Oki MC361 Color Multifunction User's Manual

Oki MC361 Color Multifunction User's Manual
MC361dn/MC561dn
User’s Manual
Advanced
This manual supports the following models:
MC361dn
MC561dn
Contents
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Terms in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Symbols in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Legends used in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1
Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sorting Copies (Sorft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Combining Multiple Pages Onto One Sheet of Paper (N-in-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Making Multiple Copies Onto One Sheet of Paper (Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Copying ID Cards (ID Card Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Erasing Edge Shadows (Edge Eras) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Setting Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Copying Different Size Documents (Mixed Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Note for Using Multiple Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Functions That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Disabling a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2
Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Useful Operations for Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmitting Duplex Documents (DuplexScan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing Where Documents Are Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Changing the Sender Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Setting Prefix (PreFix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Registering a Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using a Prefix When Transmitting Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using a Prefix When Registering a Number to Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Various Functions for Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Manual Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmission in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmission to Multiple Destinations (Broadcast) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmission at a Specified Time (Set Tx time). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Fcode Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Registering Fcode Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmission Using a Sub Address (Fcode Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Reception Using a Sub Address (Fcode Polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Storing Documents in a Bulletin Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Printing Stored Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Deleting Stored Bulletin Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Deleting Fcode Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
-2-
Contents
Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Security Functions at Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ID Check Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Checking Broadcast Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Pressing Dial Twice (Confirm Dial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Various Settings for Fax Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
When Received Image is Larger Than Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Specifying a Reduction Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Specifying a Reduction Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Changing Buzzer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Forwarding Received Faxes As Fax Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Registering a Forwarding Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting waiting time for a response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Faxing From a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Sending a Fax From a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Adding a Fax Number to the Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Grouping Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Sending a Fax to a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Attaching a Cover Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Canceling a Fax Job From a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Exporting and Importing Phone Book Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Associating New Definition With Phone Book Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Advanced Operations for Scanning to E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Setting Sender and Reply to Addresses (From/Reply to) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Creating Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Registering a Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Registering Body Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Advanced Operations for Scanning and Internet Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Specifying the File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing the Scan Size (Scan Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing the Resolution (Document Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Adjusting the Density (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Specifying the File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Encrypting PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Setting a password for opening a document and authentication password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Use the default password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Setting the Compression Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setting the Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using Drivers and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using TWAIN Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
-3-
Contents
Starting a Scan Job (for Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Changing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Starting a Scan Job (for Mac OS X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Changing Settings (for Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using WIA Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Starting a Scan Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using Windows FAX and Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using ActKey Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Installing the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Starting the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Starting ActKey when Scanning to a Local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fax Transmission of Scanned Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setting the Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Useful Functions for Internet Faxing and Scan To E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enabling MDN and DSN Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enabling MDN Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Useful Functions for Scanning to Local and Remote PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Setting PC Scan Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Enabling the Network TWAIN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4
Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Manual Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For Mac OS X Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Printing on Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For Mac OS X Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Printing on Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Printing on Custom Size Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For Windows PCL Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Combining Multiple Pages Onto One Sheet of Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Making Duplex Prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
-4-
Contents
Scaling to Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Collating Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For Windows Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting the Page Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Booklet Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cover Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Poster Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Changing Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For Windows Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Enhancing Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Emphasizing Fine Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
For Windows Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Auto Tray Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Auto Tray Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Saving Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
For Windows PCL X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Secure Printing (for MC561dn Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Encrypted Secure Printing (for MC561dn Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Watermark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
For Windows Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Overlay Printing (for MC561dn Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
For Windows PCL Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Storing Print Data (for MC561dn Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Saving the Driver Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
-5-
Contents
Changing the Driver's Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
For Windows Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using Printer Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
For Windows PCL Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using Computer Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
For Windows PCL Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using a Print Buffer (MC561dn Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Changing the Mono-Print Speed Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Printing to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
For Windows Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Printing E-mail Attached Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Downloading PS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
For OKI LPR Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Printing Out PS Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
For Windows PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Changing Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5
Job Macro (for MC561dn Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
JOB MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing the Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Deleting a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Changing the Equipment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Admin Setup or Easy Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Other Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Checking the Current Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
List of the Device Setting Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
List of Each Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Setup. . . . . . . . . .
Address Book . . . . . . . . .
Phone Book . . . . . . . . . .
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Scan Destination
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
-6-
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
74
75
76
76
77
79
Contents
Store Document Settings.
View Information . . . . . .
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . .
Easy Setup . . . . . . . . . .
Admin Setup . . . . . . . . .
7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
80
80
80
81
82
Useful Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
List of Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Windows Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Mac OS X Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installing Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installing from the Software CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Download from the Okidata website and install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Webpage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Access the machine webpage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Log in as the administrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Changing the Administrator's password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Checking Machine Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Changing Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Get the Date and Time Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Windows Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Registering the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Removing a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Check the Status of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Set the Email Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Set Speed Dials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setting Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setting a PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Set a network scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Device Setting Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Alert Info Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Network Setting Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Cloning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Storage Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Register Forms (Form Overlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Check the Free Space in SD Memory Cards or Flash Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Delete Unwanted Jobs from an SD Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
PDF Print Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Print a PDF file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Print Control Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
-7-
Contents
Setting the user name and job account ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting Pop-Up Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Set a job account ID for each user in Hide mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Allocates the same ID to all users in hide mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Do not Distinguish Between Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Operator Panel Language Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Network Card Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Launching the Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Configuring Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Set Web settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Changing the Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Change the Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
OKI LPR Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Launching the Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Adding a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Downloading Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Displaying the Machine Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Checking/Deleting/Forwarding Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Forwarding Jobs Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Print with Multiple Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Open a Webpage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adding Comments to Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Automatically Configuring the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Uninstall the OKI LPR Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Network Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Launch the Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Check Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Set Options Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Uninstall the Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
TELNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Mac OS X Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Panel Language Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Print Control Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Registering a User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Register Multiple Users at the Same Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Changing User ID and Username.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Deleting User IDs and Usernames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Network Card Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Configure the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Configure Web settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Quit Network Card Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Network Scanner Setup Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Carry out a network scan for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8
Adjusting Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Adjusting Color on the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Adjusting Color Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Adjusting the Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
-8-
Contents
Fine Adjustment of Color Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Adjusting the Color Balance (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Printing Color Swatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Adjusting the Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Color Adjustment for Copying and Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adjusting Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Adjusting the Hue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Adjusting Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Adjusting RGB Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Color Adjustment for Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
About ColorMatching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Color Matching (Office Color) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
If you are Using a Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
If you are Using a Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Black Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
If you are Using a Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Printing in Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Overprinting Black (Overprinting black) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
For Windows PS Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
For Mac OS X Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Simulating Printing Results in Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Color Separation Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
For Windows PS Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Using ColorSync (Mac OS X Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Profile Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Registering ICC Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Color Matching Using ICC Profile (Graphic Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Color Correct Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Changing Palette Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Changing Gamma Value or Hue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
-9-
Contents
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Printing in Adjusted Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
If you are Using a Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Saving Color Correction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Importing Color Correction Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Deleting Color Correction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Color Swatch Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Printing Color Swatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Customizing the Color Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Printing a File With the Color You Want . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Registering Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
For Windows PS Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Printing a File With the Adjusted Gamma Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
For Windows PS Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Network Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Encrypting Communication by SSL/TLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Creating a Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Enabling Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Opening the Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
IPP Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Encrypting Communication by IPSec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Configuring Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configuring Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Controlling Access Using IP Address (IP Filtering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Control Access Using MAC Address (MAC Address Filtering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Error Notification by E-mail (E-mail Alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Configuring Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Regular Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Alert At Time of Error Occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Using SNMPv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Using IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Enabling IPv6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Checking IPv6 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
- 10 -
Contents
Using IEEE802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Configuring Your Machine for IEEE802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Connecting Your Machine to Authentication Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring LDAP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Configuring Secure Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Printing Without Printer Driver (Direct Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Printing PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring Server to Print Files Attached to E-mails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Changing Settings on EtherTalk (for Mac OS only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Changing EtherTalk Machine Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Changing EtherTalk Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Initializing Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Using DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Configuring DHCP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Configuring Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10 Settings for Auto Delivery and Transmission Data Save 
Functions (for MC561dn Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Forwarding Received Faxes As Digital Data (Auto Delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configuration for the Auto Delivery Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Saving Transmission and Reception Data (Transmission Data Save). . . . . . 178
Configuration for the Transmission Data Save Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
11 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Initializing an SD memory card (for MC561dn Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Formatting the Entire Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Formatting a particular partition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Initializing Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Resetting the Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Deleting or Updating the Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Deleting a Printer or Fax Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Updating a Printer or Fax Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Deleting a Scanner Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Updating a Scanner Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
For Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
- 11 -
Contents
Limit Items on When in Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Printer Driver Utility Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Network Function Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Cannot go into sleep mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cannot Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cannot Search/Change Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Protocols with the client function do not work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Protocols that need to have sleep mode deactivated to be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
12 Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
About Using Print Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Number of Job Account IDs and logs that can be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
- 12 -
 About This Manual
Terms in this document
The following terms are used in this manual:
Note
 Indicates important information on operations. Make sure to read them.
Memo
 Indicates additional information on operations. You are recommended to read them.
Reference
 Indicates where to look when you want to know more detailed or related information.
WARNING
 Indicates additional information which, if ignored or failed to follow the guidelines, may result in personal fatal
injury or death.
CAUTION
 Indicates additional information which, if ignored, may result in personal injury.
Symbols in this document
The following symbols are used in this guide:
Symbols
Description
[
]
 Indicates menu names on the display screen.
 Indicates menu, window, dialog names on the computer.
"
"
 Indicates messages and enter text on the display screen.
 Indicates file names on the computer.
 Indicates reference titles.
<
>
> key
Indicates a hardware key on the operator panel or a key on
the keyboard of the computer.
Indicates how to get to the menu you want on the menu of
the machine or the computer.
- 13 -
Legends used in this manual
In this document, it may have written as follows.
 PostScript3 Emulation  PSE, POSTSCRIPT3 Emulation, POSTSCRIPT3 EMULATION
 Microsoft® Windows® 7 64-bit Edition operating system  Windows 7 (64bit version)
 Microsoft® Windows Vista® 64-bit Edition operating system  Windows Vista (64bit version) ※
 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 64-bit Edition operating system  Windows Server 2008 R2 ※
 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 64-bit Edition operating system  Windows Server 2008 (64bit version) ※
 Microsoft® Windows® XP x64 Edition operating system  Windows XP (x64 version) ※
 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition operating system  Windows Server 2003 (x64 version) ※
 Microsoft® Windows® 7 operating system  Windows 7 ※
 Microsoft® Windows Vista® operating system  Windows Vista ※
 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 operating system  Windows Server 2008 ※
 Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system  Windows XP ※
 Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 operating system  Windows Server 2003 ※
 Microsoft® Windows® 2000 operating system  Windows 2000
 Generic name for Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000  Windows
※ If there is no special description, 64bit version is included in Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows
Server 2008, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. (64bit version and Windows Server 2008 R2 is
included in Windows Server 2008.)
If there is no special description, Windows 7 is used as Windows, Mac OS X 10.6 is used as Mac OS X,
and MC561dn is used as the machine for examples in this document.
Depending on your OS or model, the description on this document may be different.
- 14 -
1. Copying
1
This chapter explains your machine's various copy functions.
This section explains your machine's useful copy functions. The functions explained below are enabled
from the [Change settings] menu of the copy start screen.
Memo
 The following procedures are explained under the assumption that [Continue Scan] is disabled. For the basic procedures when
[Continue Scan] is enabled, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Sorting Copies (Sorft)
When the sort function is enabled, data is
outputted by making one copy according to page
number. Since the machine collates copies, this
function saves you the effort of sorting copies
manually. In the factory default, the sort function
is not enabled.
1
Press the <COPY> key.
2
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4
Press the
press
5
OK
OK
 Two pages
The direction to inserting a document
 Four pages 
to select [Sort] and then
Vertical setting
to select [ON] and then
.
6
Press the
appears.
7
Enter the number of copies required.
8
Press
MONO
This function allows you to copy multiple pages
of documents onto one side of a single sheet of
paper. Two or four pages can be printed onto one
side.
.
Press the
press
Combining Multiple Pages
Onto One Sheet of Paper (Nin-1)
until the copy standby screen
or
COLOR
The direction to inserting a documentt
 Four pages 
Horizontal setting
.
Reference
 The continuous scan mode allows you to copy multiple
documents at once. You can use both the ADF and
document glass for a single job if you use the continuous
scan mode. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
The direction to inserting a document
Note
 Place your document so that the top is scanned in first.
 Specify the appropriate orientation of the image in
[Direction] to get the copy result you want.
 [Zoom] is automatically set to [Auto] when [N-in-1] is
enabled. To specify the desired zoom ratio, set [N-in-1]
first and then set [Zoom].
- 15 -
Copying
 Useful Functions
Useful Functions
 A part of the document image may be missing on the copy
depending on paper, document, and zoom ratio.
Making Multiple Copies Onto
One Sheet of Paper (Repeat)
 The paper tray is automatically selected when [N-in-1] is
enabled.
This function allows you to repeatedly copy the
image on a document onto one side of a single
sheet of paper. Images can be repeated two or
four times.
Reference
 For details on how to load your document, refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
1
Press the <COPY> key.
2
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4
Press the
press
5
OK
OK
 Four repeat
to select [N-in-1] and then
.
Press the
press
 Two repeat
to select a value and then
.
Note
6
Press the
until the copy standby
screen appears.
7
Enter the number of copies required.
 Specify the appropriate orientation of the image in
[Direction] to get the copy result you want.
8
Press
 A part of the document image may be missing on the copy
depending on paper, document, and zoom ratio.
MONO
or
COLOR
.
Memo
 When you use the document glass, the continuous scan
mode is automatically enabled. Follow the instructions
displayed on the display screen.
Reference
 The continuous scan mode allows you to copy multiple
documents at once. You can use both the ADF and
document glass for a single job if you use the continuous
scan mode. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
 [Zoom] is automatically set to [Auto] when [Repeat] is
enabled. To specify the desired zoom ratio, set [Repeat]
first and then set [Zoom].
 The paper tray is automatically set when this function is
enabled.
1
Press the <COPY> key.
2
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4
Press the
press
5
OK
.
Press the
press
OK
to select [Repeat] and then
to select a value and then
.
6
Press the
until the copy standby
screen appears.
7
Enter the number of copies required.
8
Press
MONO
or
COLOR
.
Reference
 The continuous scan mode allows you to copy multiple
documents at once. You can use both the ADF and
document glass for a single job if you use the continuous
scan mode. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
- 16 -
Useful Functions
Copying ID Cards (ID Card
Copy)
Note
3
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4
Press the
then press
 You cannot use the ADF for this ID Card Copy function.
 The area of 2mm from the edge of the document glass is
the scan margin.
 The machine scans an area half the size of the specified
paper. If the document is more than half the size of the
paper size, the excess part is discarded.
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
5
Press the
press
6
OK
to select [Edge Erase] and
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
.
Enter a value for width using the ten-key
pad and then press
.
1
Press the <COPY> key.
2
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
7
Press the
until the copy standby
screen appears.
3
Press the
8
Enter the number of copies.
9
Press
to select [ID Card Copy]
and then press
4
Press the
press
OK
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
Press the
appears.
until the copy start screen
6
Place your card with the front side face
down on the document glass.
7
Enter the number of copies.
8
Press
9
When the [Please set back side of
document.] screen is displayed, place
your card with the back side face down
on the document glass.
or
MONO
COLOR
.
10 Check that [Start Scan] is selected and
then press
OK
.
Erasing Edge Shadows (Edge
Eras)
When you copy a document with the document
cover open or when you copy a book, the edges
may be printed as black shadows.
This function allows you to erase such shadows.
Reference
 You can set [Edge Erase] as a default so that you do not
have to perform the following procedure every time you
make copies. For details, refer to "View Information" P. 80.
1
Press the <COPY> key.
COLOR
.
Setting Margins (Margin)
.
5
or
MONO
OK
This margin function allows you to set the
margins. This is useful when you staple or punch
holes in copies. You can set the top, right,
bottom, or left margin by specifying the [Top]
and [Left] values.
Note
 A part of the document image may be missing on the copy.
 The specified margin values stay the same even when you
change the zoom ratio.
 Specify the appropriate orientation of the image in
[Direction] to get the copy result you want.
Reference
 You can set [Margin] as a default so that you do not have
to perform the following procedure every time you make
copies. For details, refer to "View Information" P. 80.
 When Making Simplex Copies
1
Press the <COPY> key.
2
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
4
Press the
press
5
OK
to select [Margin] and then
.
Press the
press
- 17 -
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
1
Copying
This function allows you to copy both sides
of an ID card, such as a driver's license,
onto one side of a piece of paper.
2
Useful Functions
6
Press the
or
to specify the [Top]
margin for [Front] and then press the .
8
- To create a margin at the top of the output,
specify a positive value.
- To create a margin on the left side of the output,
specify a positive value.
- To create a margin at the bottom of the output,
specify a negative value.
7
Press
or
- To create a margin on the right side of the output,
specify a negative value.
to specify the [Left]
margin for [Front] and then press
OK
Press
or
to specify the [Left]
margin for [Front] and then press 
the .
9
.
- To create a margin on the left side of the output,
specify a positive value.
Press
or
to specify the [Top]
margin for [Back] and then press the
.
- To create a margin at the top of the output,
specify a negative value.
- To create a margin on the right side of the output,
specify a negative value.
- To create a margin at the bottom of the output,
specify a positive value.
Memo
 You do not have to specify the [Back] margin when
copying on a single side.
8
Press the
appears.
9
Enter the number of copies.
10 Press
 Specify the same absolute value set in the [Top]
margin for both the [Front] and [Back] margins.
until the copy start screen
or
MONO
Memo
COLOR
10 Press the
or
to specify the [Left]
margin for [Back] and then press
OK
.
- To create a margin on the left side of the output,
specify a negative value.
.
- To create a margin on the right side of the output,
specify a positive value.
Memo
 [Margin] is disabled when all the values are set to [0].
Memo
 When Making Duplex Copies
 Specify the same absolute value set in the [Left]
margin for both the [Front] and [Back] margins.
When you make duplex copies with [Margin]
enabled, you must specify the [Back] margin.
11 Press the
until the copy standby
screen appears.
1
Press the <COPY> key.
2
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3
Specify [Duplex Copy] as you want.
Reference
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
5
Press the
press
6
OK
to select [Margin] and then
.
Press the
press
7
OK
13 Press
MONO
or
COLOR
.
Memo
 For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
4
12 Enter the number of copies.
 The position of margin is according to [Direction] of the
document.
If [Direction] of the document image is [Portrait], the
short edges are located in top and bottom edges, and long
edges are located in the right and left edges. If
[Direction] of the document image is [Landscape], the
long edges are located in right and left edges and the short
edges are located in the top and bottom edges.
 When you use the document glass, the continuous scan
mode is automatically enabled. Follow the instructions
displayed on the display screen.
 [Margin] is disabled when all the values are set to [0].
to select [ON] and then
.
Press the
or
to specify the [Top]
margin for [Front] and then press the .
- To create a margin at the top of the output,
specify a positive value.
- To create a margin at the bottom of the output,
specify a negative value.
- 18 -
Useful Functions
13 Enter the number of copies.
Copying Different Size
Documents (Mixed Size)
14 Press
Note
Some functions cannot be used in combination
with other functions. If you try to select
incompatible functions, a message indicating that
you cannot select the function appears.
 [Mixed Size] is available only when [Zoom] is set to [Fit
to page(98%)] or [100%].
 You cannot set [Edge Erase] and [Mixed Size] at the
same time.
For example, when you have specified [Margin],
you cannot specify [N-in-1] and [Repeat].
 Enable more than one paper tray by pressing the
<SETTING> key and then selecting [Paper Setup]>
[Select Tray]>[Copy] to use this function.
 When you use the MP tray, load paper in the MP tray first
and then enter the [Mixed Size] menu.
When selecting [Margin] 
you cannot specify [N-in-1]/
[Repeat].
Memo
 You can use only standard paper for this function.
 In this section Tray1 and MP tray are used, and Legal 14 is
loaded in Tray1 and Letter is loaded in MP tray as an
example.
2
Press the <SETTING> key.
3
Press the
press OK .
.
Functions That Cannot Be Used
Simultaneously
 When Enabling [Mixed Size], [Paper Feed] is set to
[Auto], a paper tray corresponding to a document is fed
and [Paper Feed] can not be selected.
Load Legal 14 in Tray1 and Letter in MP
tray.
COLOR
Note for Using Multiple
Functions
 You can use this function only when the document is a
combination of letter and legal 13.5 or of letter and legal
14.
1
or
Of functions displayed in the message, disable
unnecessary functions and then try to set a
function you want to use again.
Memo
 Some functions cannot be used with others.
to select [Paper] and then
Disabling a Function
4
Select [Legal 14] for [Paper Size] of
Tray1 and [Letter] for [Paper Size] of
MP tray.
To disable one of the functions, return the
function's setting to the default.
5
6
7
Press
1
Press the <COPY> key.
Press the <COPY> key.
2
Place your documents with mixing Letter
and Legal 14 sizes in the ADF.
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
3
Press the
to select the function you
want to disable and then press OK .
4
Press the
to select the default value
and then press OK .
5
Press the
until the copy standby
screen appears.
until the top screen appears.
8
Press the
to enter the [Change
settings] menu.
9
Press the
then press
to select [Mixed Size] and
OK
.
10 Press the
press
OK
to select [ON] and then
.
Memo
11 Press the
until the copy standby
screen appears.
 When the default setting has been changed from the
factory default, select the default setting after changing
should be selected.
12 Check that the following settings are
displayed on the start screen.
[Mixed Size]:
ON
[Paper Feed]:
Auto
[Zoom]:
100%
[Scan size]:
Legal 14
Reference
 For the default value of each function, refer to "View
Information" P. 80.
- 19 -
1
Copying
When you use the ADF, you can copy multiple
documents having the same width but different
lengths at the same time onto their respective
paper sizes.
MONO
2. Faxing
This chapter explains your machine's useful fax functions and operations.
 Useful Operations for Transmission
2
This section explains useful operations for fax transmission.
Memo
Reference
 For details on how to specify a destination, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
 For details on how to load your documents in the ADF or on the document glass, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Transmitting Duplex
Documents (DuplexScan)
Changing Where Documents
Are Loaded
You can transmit duplex documents by using the
ADF.
You can use both the ADF and the document
glass when scanning documents for a fax job.
This allows you to send both a document and a
part of a book as one fax.
Note
 You cannot use the document glass for this procedure.
1
Place your document in the ADF.
1
Press the <FAX> key.
2
Press the <FAX> key.
2
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
3
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
then press
screen.
4
Press the
OK
to open the fax start
Press the
Press the
OK
OK
4
.
OK
Press the
to select [Fax Functions]
Press the
5
.
.
You can specify [Long edge bind] or [Short
edge bind].
Press the
press
OK
OK
.
to select [Continue Scan]
and then press
to select a scanning method
and then press
to open the fax start
OK
and then press
to select [Duplex Scan]
and then press
6
3
to select [Fax Functions]
and then press
5
then press
screen.
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
.
6
Press the
appears.
7
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
7
Press the
appears.
8
Specify a destination.
8
Specify a destination.
9
Press
9
Press
MONO
until the fax standby screen
until the fax standby screen
to start transmission.
MONO
.
10 When the [Start Scan] screen appears,
place the next document with text face
up in the ADF or face down on the
document glass.
11 Make sure [Start Scan] is selected and
then press
- 20 -
OK
.
Faxing
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Useful Operations for Transmission
12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 as necessary for
each document you want to fax.
 Changing the Sender Name Printed
on a Fax
By default, the standard sender name is printed
on faxes when you enable [Sender Name]. To
use a sender name other than the standard
sender name, perform the following procedure.
13 When all the documents are scanned,
press the
to select [Scan Complete]
and then press OK .
Reference
 For details on how to stop scanning and to cancel
transmission, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
1
Press the <FAX> key.
2
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
then press
screen.
Changing the Sender Name
You can specify the sender name to be printed on
faxes you send. You must register a Sender
name in advance.
3
Press the
to select [Fax Functions]
and then press
4
Press the
then press
Reference
 Make sure that [Sender name] is enabled before using
the following functions. For details, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
to open the fax start
OK
5
Press the
OK
.
to select [TTI Select] and
OK
.
to select a sender name you
wan to use and then press
 Registering a Sender Name
You can register up to three sender names.
6
Press the
appears.
OK
.
until the fax standby screen
Memo
 Changing the Standard Sender
Name
 In the initial fax settings described in the User's Manual
Basic, you specify [Sender ID], which is automatically
registered to [Sender name 1].
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
If you use a sender name frequently, we
recommend to specify it as the standard sender
name.
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
OK
Memo
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
 In the initial fax settings described in the User's Manual
Basic, you specify [Sender ID]. By default, this value is
used as the standard sender name.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
5
Press the
2
Press the
then press
6
Press the
Press the
.
to select [User Install] and
OK
to select [TTI Register/
OK
.
to select a sender's number
and then press
OK
.
Enter a name up to 22 characters.
9
Select [Enter] and then press
OK
.
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
6
Press the
7
Press the
- 21 -
Press the
appears.
.
.
to select [Standard TTI]
OK
.
to select a name you want
to use and then press
8
OK
to select [User Install] and
OK
and then press
.
until the start screen appears.
OK
3
then press
8
10 Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
.
Edit] and then press
7
OK
OK
.
until the start screen
Useful Operations for Transmission
Using a Prefix When Registering a
Number to Speed Dial
Setting Prefix (PreFix)
You can add a prefix to a destination number. You
can also attach a prefix when registering a number
to speed dial.
You can attach a prefix to a speed dial number.
Perform the following procedures to register a
number to speed dial.
Registering a Prefix
Reference
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
OK
.
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
6
Press the
Press the
press
OK
.
Enter a fax number.
3
Select [Enter] and then press
.
to select [Other Settings]
and then press
7
OK
2
to select [Fax Setup] and
OK
OK
.
to select [Prefix] and then
.
8
Enter a prefix.
9
Select [Enter] and then press
10 Press the
OK
.
until the top screen appears.
Reference
 You can use symbols such as # and *. For details, refer to
the User's Manual Basic.
Using a Prefix When Transmitting
Faxes
You can attach a prefix only when you enter a
destination number using the ten-key pad.
Perform the following procedures when
specifying a destination using the ten-key pad.
1
On the destination entry screen, press
the
and
to select [PreFix:N] and
OK
then press
.
The area code is displayed as "N".
2
Enter a destination number.
3
Select [Enter] and then press
On the fax number entry screen to
register a number to speed dial, press
the
and
to select [PreFix:N] and
then press OK .
The area code is displayed as "N".
3
then press
1
OK
.
Memo
 You cannot enter a prefix and then use speed dial.
- 22 -
OK
.
Faxing
 For details on how to register a number to speed dial, refer
to the User's Manual Basic.
You must register the prefix to [PreFix] in
advance. You can register up to 40 digits.
2
Various Functions for Transmission
 Various Functions for Transmission
This section explains various functions for fax transmission.
Memo
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Reference
 For details on how to specify a destination, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Manual Redialing
Redialing
To redial manually, specify the desired
destination from the transmission history.
Automatic Redialing
The machine automatically redials if the first fax
transmission fails. Redial is automatically done
when the recipient machine is busy or does not
answer, or when a communication error happens.
To set the number of redial attempts and their
interval, perform the following procedures.
Memo
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
OK
Transmission in Real Time
 Real time transmission
The real time transmission is a method to
transmit data to a destination party without
storing document data in memory. In this mode,
transmission starts right after the transmission
operation, and this allows you to check that the
fax is transmitted to its destination.
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
 For details on the transmission history, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
The scanned fax data is stored in memory before
the machine starts transmission. This is called
memory transmission. The fax data is
transmitted while it is scanned. This is called real
time transmission.
 When the transmission failed though the machine tried
redials for the specified times, the document stored in
memory is erased and an error message is printed out.
1
Reference
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press.
 Memory transmission
5
Press the
The memory transmission is a method to
transmit after storing document data in memory.
then press
6
Press the
to select [Fax Setup] and
OK
.
to select [Other Settings]
and then press
7
OK
8
Make sure that [Redial Tries] is
OK
To enable the real time transmission, perform the
following operation.
.
Press to specify the desired number of
redial attempts and then press
9
The factory default is set to the memory
transmission.
.
selected and then press
In this mode, you do not have to wait for the
machine to finish transmission.
Press the
OK
Note
 You can scan only a single page when using the document
glass for real time transmission.
.
to select [Redial Interval]
and then press
OK
.
10 Specify the desired redial interval using
the ten-key pad and then press
11 Press the
OK
.
 While you send a fax by using real time transmission, other
jobs using the ADF and document glass cannot be done.
1
Press the <FAX> key.
2
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
press
until the top screen appears.
3
- 23 -
OK
to open the fax start screen.
Press the
to select [Fax Functions]
and then press OK .
Various Functions for Transmission
Press the
to select [Memory Tx] and
OK
then press .
5
Press the
press OK .
6
Press the
appears.
7
Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
8
Specify a destination.
9
Press
MONO
to select [OFF] and then
Transmission to Multiple
Destinations (Broadcast)
This function allows you to transmit faxes to
multiple destinations at the same time. You can
specify up to 100 destinations using the ten-key
pad, speed dial, and group lists of destinations.
until the fax standby screen
.
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <FAX> key.
3
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
press
Manual Transmission
You can transmit faxes manually when the
recipient uses manual reception mode or when
you want to send a fax after talking on the phone.
4
 You need to connect an external telephone to the machine
to send faxes manually.
to open the fax start screen.
Make sure that [Add Destination] is
selected and then press
6
Repeat steps 4 to 5 to enter all the
destinations.
7
When you have specified all the
destinations, press
.
[Please press Start key to begin
transmission. To delete, select address
and press Delete.] appears.
9
If specified all the destination appears,
- Fcode transmission
- check broadcast destinations
MONO
8
- transmission at the specified time
- ID check transmission
.
Specify a destination.
 The following functions are unavailable in manual
transmission:
- broadcast
OK
5
Note
 You can scan only a single page when using the document
glass for manual transmission.
OK
press
- (Pressing Dial Twice confirm dial)
MONO
.
Memo
Memo
 Press the <RESET/LOG OUT> key to cancel the
operation.
 You do not have to disable memory transmission.
 Even if the start screen other than the fax functions is
displayed in the machine, you can perform manual
transmission by lifting the handset.
Reference
 When [Broadcast Destination] is enabled, the
destination numbers are displayed before transmission.
For details, refer to "Checking Broadcast Destination" P. 29.
1
Pick up the handset.
2
Dial a number.
3
Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
4
Configure the fax functions if necessary.
5
When you hear a Fax tone, press
to start transmission.
 For details on how to cancel transmission, refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
 Using From the Group List
The group list is useful for broadcast
transmission. Register destination group lists in
advance.
MONO
Reference
 For details on transmission using the group list, refer to
the User's Manual Basic.
You can put down the handset.
Memo
 When putting down the handset, after the transmission is
complete, the display screen of the machine returns to the
screen displayed before the manual transmission.
If you keep picking the handset, you can talk to your
destination.
- 24 -
2
Faxing
4
Various Functions for Transmission
Transmission at a Specified
Time (Set Tx time)
Fcode Transmission
Fcode transmission uses sub addresses for
communication in accordance with the standard
of ITU-T. By creating and registering Fcode boxes,
you can perform confidential communication and
bulletin board communication.
This function allows you to instruct the machine
to transmit faxes at a specified time. When you
set a fax job to be sent later, the fax data is
stored in memory and automatically sent at the
specified time.
You can register up to 20 Fcode boxes.
Up to 20 jobs can be scheduled up to one month
in advance.
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <FAX> key.
3
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
press
4
Press the
to select [Fax Functions]
and then press
5
Press the
then press
6
Press the
press
7
OK
OK
 To transmit faxes using Fcode confidential communication,
refer to "Transmission Using a Sub Address (Fcode
Transmission)" P. 27.
.
 To print the received faxes using Fcode confidential
communication, refer to "Printing Stored Documents" P. 28.
to select [ON] and then
 Fcode Bulletin Board Communication
.
Press the
or
When an Fcode bulletin box is set in the recipient
machine, you can transmit to and remove data
from a bulletin box by specifying its sub address.
to select the desired
date and time and then press
- To move to the next box, press the
OK
.
.
Reference
- Dates are displayed as [Date/Month].
8
9
When an Fcode confidential box is set in the
recipient fax machine, you can perform confidential
communication by specifying the sub address of
the box.
Reference
.
to select [Delayed Tx] and
OK
 Fcode Confidential Communication
Received data cannot be printed unless the
specified ID code is entered. Therefore, this
function is useful when transmitting data that
needs security protection.
to open the fax start screen.
OK
When registering an Fcode box, be sure to
register a sub address, that is used to identify
the Fcode box.
Press the
appears.
until the start screen
 To transmit faxes to a bulletin box of the recipient's
machine, refer to "Transmission Using a Sub Address
(Fcode Transmission)" P. 27.
Press the
to select [Add Destination]
 To receive data stored in the bulletin box of the recipient
machine, refer to "Reception Using a Sub Address (Fcode
Polling)" P. 27.
and then press
OK
 To store data in a bulletin box of your machine, refer to
"Storing Documents in a Bulletin Box" P. 27.
.
10 Specify a destination.
11 Press
MONO
Registering Fcode Boxes
.
Memo
 When you want to change the specified time of a
reservation, cancel the reservation and make another one.
 You can make reservations for other fax jobs while the
machine is transmitting.
Reference
To perform Fcode communication, register an
Fcode box. Be sure to register a sub address and
an PIN number on each Fcode box. (Only Fcode
confidential communication)
Memo
 Maximum number of characters is as follows:
- Box Name: A maximum of 16 characters.
 For details on how to cancel a fax job, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
- Sub-Address: A maximum of 20 digits including # and *.
- PIN number: 4 digits.
Reference
 For details on how to enter text, refer to the User's Manual
Basic.
- 25 -
Various Functions for Transmission
 For Fcode Confidential Communication
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
OK
19 Press
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
then press
7
8
.
.
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select a box number and
OK
.
.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
6
selected and then press
OK
7
then press
.
10 Make sure that [Box Name] is selected
and then press
8
OK
.
9
.
to select [Fcode Box] and
OK
.
to select a box number and
OK
.
Make sure that [Register] is selected
Press the
OK
.
to select [Bulletin Box]
and then press
13 Press the
to select [Sub-Address]
and then press the .
OK
.
10 Make sure that [Box Name] is selected
and then press the
14 Enter a sub address.
OK
12 Select [Enter] and then press
to select [I.D. code] and
then press the .
17 Enter a PIN number and then press
.
11 Enter a box name.
.
16 Press the
OK
OK
.
13 Press the
to select [Sub-Address]
and then press .
.
14 Enter a sub address.
Note
 The entered PIN number is not displayed. Be sure to
write it down and keep it safe.
18 If necessary, specify [Hold time] to set
15 Select [Enter] and then press
16 Press
a period to retain data.
a) Press the
then press
.
To edit the registered Fcode Confidential Box,
select [Edit].
11 Enter a box name.
15 Select [Enter] and then press
OK
and then press
.
12 Select [Enter] and then press
Press the
OK
to select [Fax Setup] and
Press the
then press
Make sure that [Confidential Box] is
.
Enter the administrator password.
then press
To edit the registered Fcode Confidential Box,
enter the PIN number and select [Edit].
OK
3
Make sure that [Register] is selected
OK
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
.
and then press
9
1
to select [Fcode Box] and
OK
2
.
 For Fcode Bulletin Board Communication
to select [Fax Setup] and
Press the
then press
OK
OK
to select [Hold time] and
.
- 26 -
OK
.
OK
.
Faxing
4
Press the
.
 When [00] (day) is set, data is retained for an
indefinite period.
.
Enter the administrator password.
OK
OK
Memo
3
6
and then press
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
then press
b) Enter a value between 0 and 31 (days),
Various Functions for Transmission
Transmission Using a Sub Address
(Fcode Transmission)
2
By entering a sub address, Fcode confidential
transmission and Fcode bulletin board
transmission can be done.
3
press
4
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <FAX> key.
3
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
4
to open the fax start screen.
OK
Press the
to select [Fax Functions]
and then press
5
Press the
press
6
OK
.
select [Fcode Tx] and then
.
Press the
press
7
OK
OK
to select [ON] and then
8
Select [Enter] and then press
9
Press the
appears.
OK
.
until the start screen
to select [Add
OK
.
11 Specify a destination.
OK
.
to select [Fcode Polling]
Press the
press
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
.
6
Enter the sub address of the bulletin box
registered in the sender machine.
7
Select [Enter] and then press
8
Press the
until the start screen appears.
9
Press the
to select [Add Destination]
and then press
OK
OK
.
.
10 Specify a destination.
11 Press
MONO
.
 Received data is automatically printed.
Storing Documents in a Bulletin Box
You can store only one document in a bulletin
box of your machine.
 You must register a bulletin box in advance. For details on
how to register a bulletin box, refer to "Registering Fcode
Boxes" P. 25.
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <SETTING> key.
3
Press the
.
Reception Using a Sub Address
(Fcode Polling)
You can perform Fcode polling by entering the
sub address of a sender machine's bulletin box.
This function makes a remote fax machine
transmit a fax in response to instructions from
your machine.
 You cannot receive data if the sender has a password on
the bulletin box.
to select [Store Document
Settings] and then press
4
5
OK
Make sure that [Fcode Bulletin board]
Press the
then press
Press the <FAX> key.
- 27 -
.
.
is selected and then press
6
OK
Make sure that [Store] is selected and
then press
Note
1
Press the
OK
Reference
Destination] and then press
MONO
to select [Fax Functions]
Memo
Enter the sub address of the box
registered in the recipient machine.
12 Press
5
.
10 Press the
Press the
and then press
 Be sure to check a destination sub address.
press
to open the fax standby screen.
OK
and then press
Memo
1
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
OK
.
to select a box number and
OK
.
Various Functions for Transmission
Press the
to select [Store Document
Settings] and then press OK .
3
Press the
press OK .
4
Make sure that [Fcode Bulletin board]
is selected and then press OK .
2
5
Press the
to select the box number of
a document you want to delete and then
press OK two times.
Faxing
Make sure that [Over Write] is selected
2
You can print confidential received documents.
6
When a document is received at an Fcode box,
an Fcode reception notice is printed. Check the
Fcode box number and print the stored
document.
Press the
or
to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press OK .
Deleting Fcode Boxes
7
and then press
OK
.
[Over Write] replaces documents in the box.
8
Press the
then press
or
OK
to select [Yes] and
.
Memo
 The data stored in an Fcode bulletin box is not deleted
when the recipient gets it.
Printing Stored Documents
to select [Delete] and then
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
You can delete an unnecessary Fcode
Confidential box and Fcode bulletin box.
2
Press the
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press OK .
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
then press
to select [Store Document
Settings] and then press
3
Press the
press
4
OK
.
Make sure that [Fcode Box] is selected
Press the
OK
.
to select the desired box
number and then press
6
OK
.
Press the
OK
.
Press the
or
OK
.
OK
to select [Fcode Box] and
.
Enter the PIN number if necessary and then
press OK .
To delete Fcode bulletin box, PIN number is not
necessary.
Memo
 Confidential received documents are automatically deleted
after printing.
9
Press the
press OK .
10 Press the
to select [Delete] and then
or
to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press OK .
You can delete documents stored in a bulletin
box.
Memo
 The data stored in an Fcode confidential box is
automatically deleted when you print the data.
 The data stored in an Fcode bulletin box is not deleted
when the recipient gets it.
1
to select [Fax Setup] and
.
8
.
Deleting Stored Bulletin Documents
OK
.
Press the
to select the box number
you want to delete and then press OK .
to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press
Press the
then press
OK
OK
7
to select the file number
you want to print and then press
8
6
If necessary, enter the PIN number and
then press
7
.
to select [Print] and then
and then press
5
OK
Press the <SETTING> key.
- 28 -
Security Functions
 Security Functions
This section explains the security functions at fax transmission.
Memo
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Reference
 For details on how to specify a destination, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
9
Security Functions at
Transmission
until the top screen appears.
 Operation
The machine has the following three security
functions:
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <FAX> key.
3
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
 ID check transmission
 Checking broadcast destination
 Pressing dial twice
These functions prevent you from transmitting
faxes to the wrong destination.
press
4
ID Check Transmission
OK
to open the fax start screen.
Make sure that [Add Destination] is
selected and then press
This function checks and matches the last four
digits of the destination numbers with those
registered in the destination machine. If this
function is enabled, the machine will transmit
faxes only when they match.
Memo
 If the destination machine has no registered fax number,
the machine does not transmit the fax.
 ID check transmission is unavailable when you transmit
faxes manually.
5
Specify a destination.
6
Press
MONO
OK
.
.
Checking Broadcast Destination
When this function is enabled, a fax number
confirmation screen is displayed before
transmission starts. By factory default, this
function is enabled.
 Configuration
Memo
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
 Broadcast destination check function is available only
when multiple destinations are specified.
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
Press the
OK
.
 When [Confirm Dial] is also enabled, it is done first.
 Broadcast destination check function is unavailable by
manual transmission.
3
Enter the administrator password.
 Configuration
4
Select [Enter] and then press
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
5
Press the
2
Press the
then press
6
Press the
OK
to select [Security
OK
.
Make sure that [ID Check Tx] is
Press the
press
OK
OK
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
.
to select [ON] and then
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
.
selected and then press
8
.
to select [Fax Setup] and
Function] and then press
7
OK
then press
6
.
Press the
.
to select [Fax Setup] and
OK
.
to select [Security
Function] and then press
- 29 -
OK
OK
.
Security Functions
7
Press the
to select [Broadcast
Destination] and then press
8
Press the
press
9
OK
OK
Memo
.
 The confirm dial function is unavailable when you specify
the destination using speed dial.
to select [ON] and then
 If you use symbols in the destination number, re-enter the
symbols also.
.
Press the
until the top screen appears.
 Operation
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <FAX> key.
3
Make sure that [Fax] is selected and
 Configuration
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
and then press
4
Select [Enter] and then press
selected and then press
5
Press the
OK
.
6
Press
MONO
then press
6
.
7
[Please press Start key to begin
transmission. To delete, select address
and press Delete.] appears.
MONO
8
OK
[Delete The Address] and then press
Press
MONO
9
to select the destination
you want to delete and then press the
.
.
to select [Confirm Dial]
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
Press the
until the top screen appears.
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <FAX> key.
3
Enter a destination number using the
ten-key pad.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
to start transmission.
Memo
 If the destination number entered with the ten-key pad is
wrong, delete it and re-specify the correct one.
 When many destinations are specified, you may not be
able to check all of them at one time. To check all the
destinations, press the
Press the
OK
 Operation
. Select
OK
to select [Security
press OK .
.
If necessary, press
Press the
.
.
and then press
If specified all the destination appears,
press
Press the
OK
to select [Fax Setup] and
OK
Function] and then press
A fax number confirmation screen is displayed.
9
.
Make sure that [Add Destination] is
to open the fax start screen.
Specify all the destinations.
8
OK
Enter the administrator password.
OK
5
7
to select [Admin Setup]
3
press
4
 You cannot use the dial double-press function with manual
sending.
to scroll the screen.
OK
.
A screen that requires you to re-enter the
destination number appears.
Pressing Dial Twice (Confirm Dial)
This function requires you to re-enter the
destination number when you enter a destination
using the ten-key pad. The fax is sent only if the
two numbers match.
5
Enter the destination number again using
the ten-key pad.
6
Select [Enter] and then press
OK
.
The fax start screen appears.
7
- 30 -
Press
MONO
2
Faxing
1
 The confirm dial function is done first when [Check
broadcast dest.] is also enabled.
to start transmission.
Various Settings for Fax Reception
 Various Settings for Fax Reception
This section explains various settings for fax reception.
Memo
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Specifying a Reduction Margin
When Received Image is
Larger Than Paper Size
Parts of images that do not fit in the printable
area of the specified paper may be reduced,
discarded, or printed on the next sheet of paper.
For example, if a fax that is longer than A4 size is
received while the specified paper is A4 size, the
bottom of the image is printed on a subsequent
piece of paper.
You can avoid this situation by specifying a
reduction rate and margin.
Specifying a Reduction Rate
The reduction rate determines whether or not the
machine automatically reduces the received
image to the specified paper size. [Auto] reduces
the image automatically and [100%] prints the
image without reduction. By factory default, [Rx
Reduc. Rate] is set to [Auto].
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
OK
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
6
Press the
7
Press the
8
Press the
Press the
OK
.
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
Press the
Press the
OK
.
to select [Other Settings]
and then press
7
.
to select [Fax Functions]
and then press
6
OK
OK
.
to select [Reduc. Margin]
OK
.
Enter a value between 0 and 100 (mm)
Press the
OK
.
until the top screen appears.
Memo
OK
.
 When the excess part is larger than the specified reduction
margin, the excess part is printed on the next page.
 When the excess part is smaller than the specified
reduction margin, the received image is reduced onto a
single page.
.
 When you set [Rx Reduc. Rate] to [100%] and the excess
part is smaller than the specified reduction margin, the
excess part is discarded.
Changing Buzzer Volume
.
to select [Auto] or [100%]
and then press
9
OK
OK
3
to select [Rx Reduc. Rate]
and then press
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
9
to select [Other Settings]
OK
Press the
and then press
.
and then press
2
8
to select [Fax Setup] and
OK
Press the <SETTING> key.
.
3
then press
1
and then press
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
The reduction margin is the threshold level which
determines when to print part of the received
image on the next page.
.
until the top screen appears.
You can change the buzzer volume, which sounds
when there is an incoming fax or call.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
3
- 31 -
OK
.
Enter the administrator password.
Various Settings for Fax Reception
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
Press the
OK
Press the
OK
press
9
OK
until the top screen appears.
Setting waiting time for a
response
.
With this function, you can set a waiting time to
respond to an incoming call and start receiving a
fax in the machine.
to select [Fax Buzzer
OK
.
to select a volume and then
.
Press the
.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
until the top screen appears.
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
Forwarding Received Faxes As
Fax Documents
5
Press the
You can set the machine to forward the received
faxes automatically to a specified destination as fax
documents if [Forwarding Setting] is enabled.
6
Memo
 The buzzer volume setting is available only when 
[Reception Mode] is set to [Tel/Fax Ready Mode].
then press
Press the
7
Press the
.
to select [Other Settings]
 The forwarding function is disabled when [Reception Mode]
is set to [Tel Ready Mode].
Registering a Forwarding Destination
8
Press the
press
9
OK
OK
.
to select [Ring response]
and then press
 When [Forwarding Setting] is enabled, received faxes are
not printed by the machine.
.
to select [Fax Setup] and
OK
and then press
Memo
OK
OK
.
to select a time and then
.
Press the
until the top screen appears.
Memo
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press OK .
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
then press
OK
OK
 When the machine is connected to a line supporting
Number Display function and a phone supporting the
number display function is connected to the machine, set
[Waiting time for a response] to any of [10 sec.],
[15 sec.], and [20 sec.].
.
to select [Fax Setup] and
.
6
Press the
then press
to select [Fax Setting] and
OK
.
7
Press the
to select [Forwarding
Setting] and then press OK .
8
Press the
press OK .
9
Enter a forwarding number.
to select [ON] and then
- 32 -
2
Faxing
Press the
OK
.
Volume] and then press
8
11 Press the
to select [Sound Control]
and then press
7
10 Select [Enter] and then press
.
to select [Management]
and then press
6
OK
Faxing From a Computer
 Faxing From a Computer
This section explains how to send a fax from a computer and how to edit data of the phone book. The
fax driver allows you to send faxes directly from your computer to a destination via the machine without
printing the document.
This function is available only on the following Windows operating systems:
 Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
Be sure to install the fax driver for MC361dn or MC561dn before performing the following procedures.
Reference
 For details on how to install the fax driver, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Memo
 The following procedures uses MC561dn, NotePad as an example. The procedures and menus may differ depending on the OS
and application you use.
Sending a Fax From a
Computer
1
Adding a Fax Number to the
Phone Book
Open the file you want to fax.
Note
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
 You cannot register two identical names. The same fax
numbers can be registered if the names are different.
3
From [Select Printer], select [OKI
MC561 (FAX)] and then click [Print].
 You can register up to 1000 destinations.
4
Memo
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers]
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561 (FAX)].
3
On the [Setup] tab, click [Phone book].
4
From the [FAX number] menu, select
[New (FAX number)].
5
On the [New (FAX number)] dialog
box, enter a destination name in [Name].
6
Repeat steps 4 to 7 to specify all the
destinations.
Enter a destination fax number in [FAX
number].
7
Enter comments in [Comments] if necessary.
Click [OK] to start transmitting.
8
Click [OK].
9
From the [FAX number] menu, select
[Save].
On the [Specifying numbers] tab of
the [Select Recipients] dialog box,
enter the destination name in [Name].
5
Enter the destination fax number in [FAX
number].
6
Click [Add<-].
7
If necessary, add a destination from the
phone book.
a) Select the [Phone book] tab.
b) Select a destination and then click [Add<-].
8
9
10 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
11 From the [FAX number] menu, select
[Exit].
Memo
 The name and fax number entered in this procedure are
printed on the cover sheet.
- 33 -
Faxing From a Computer
Grouping Entries
By grouping the registered destinations, you can
send faxes to multiple destinations at the same
time.
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561 (FAX)].
On the [Select Recipients] dialog box,
select the [Phone book] tab.
5
Select a group from the right column and
then click [Add<-].
6
Click [OK] to start transmission.
Attaching a Cover Sheet
3
On the [Setup] tab, click [Phone book].
4
From the [FAX number] menu, select
[New (Group)].
5
On the [New (Group)] dialog box, enter
[Group name].
6
Enter comments in [Comments] if
necessary.
7
Select an entry to register in a group and
then click [Add->].
8
If necessary, register a fax number
directly.
1
Open the file you want to fax.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
From [Select Printer], select [OKI
MC561 (FAX)].
4
Click [Preferences].
5
Select the [Cover Sheet] tab.
6
Select the [Print all recipients'
information on each cover sheet] or
[Print only one recipient's
information on each cover sheet].
7
From the format list, select the desired
format.
- You can view an enlarged image of each format
by clicking [Zoom].
a) Click [New (FAX number)].
- Selecting the [Add the recipient's FAX
number] check box prints the recipient fax
number on the cover sheet.
b) Perform steps 5 to 8 in "Adding a Fax
Number to the Phone Book" P. 33.
c) Select an entry and then click [Add->].
9
- Selecting the [Add the recipient's comments]
check box prints comments registered in the
phone book on the cover sheet.
Click [OK] to save.
On the left column of the [Phone book] dialog box,
a new group is added. When you select a group,
the fax numbers registered in the group are
shown on the right column of the dialog box.
- You can add a custom cover sheet design by
clicking [Custom cover sheet].
8
If necessary, enter the sender name, fax
number, and comment on the [Sender]
tab to be printed on the cover sheet.
11 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
9
Click [OK].
12 Select [Exit] from the [FAX Number]
10 Perform steps 3 to 9 in "Sending a Fax
10 Select [Save] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
menu.
Sending a Fax to a Group
By using a group, you can specify multiple
destinations in one operation.
1
Open the file you want to fax.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
From [Select Printer], select [OKI
MC561 (FAX)] and then click [Print].
2
From a Computer" P. 33.
Note
 When selecting [Print all recipients' information on
each cover sheet] and transmitting to multiple
destinations (broadcasting), all destinations' names,
destinations' fax numbers (only when they are set), and
comments in the phone book (only when they are set) are
described on the same cover sheet and transmitted to all
destinations. Caution is required when broadcasting to
multiple outside destinations.
- 34 -
Faxing
1
4
Faxing From a Computer
9
Canceling a Fax Job From a
Computer
Repeat steps 1 to 3 on the computer to
launch the phone book.
10 From the [Tools] menu, select [Import].
You can cancel a job while the data is being
transmitted to the machine.
11 On the [Import Phone Book] dialog
box, specify the file you have copied.
1
Double-click the printer icon in the
toolbar.
2
Select the job to cancel in the print
queue.
13 Select [Save] from the [FAX Number]
3
From the [Document] menu, select
[Cancel].
14 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
12 Click [Next].
menu.
15 Select [Exit] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
Reference
 Once the data is stored in the machine, you cannot cancel
the job from your computer. For details on how to cancel a
fax job stored in the machine memory, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
Exporting and Importing
Phone Book Data
The export and import functions allow you to
manage the fax numbers in a phone book
created on another computer. The following
procedure explains how to export the phone
book data from your computer and to import it to
another computer.
Note
 You cannot export groups. However, each entry in a group
is exported.
Associating New Definition With
Phone Book Format
If you want to import a CSV file with the format
different from that of the phone book, select a
CSV definition file and associate the definition
with that of the phone book.
1
Repeat steps 1 to 3 in "Exporting and
Importing Phone Book Data" on the
computer to launch the phone book.
2
From the [Tools] menu, select [Import].
3
On the [Import Phone Book] dialog
box, specify the CSV file to import in
[Choose a CSV File].
4
Select the [Setup relationship
between the fields imported and
phone book.] check box and specify a
CSV definition file if necessary.
 Entries that are already registered are not imported.
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561 (FAX)].
Select [Comma (,)] from [Field Delimiter].
Memo
3
On the [Setup] tab, click [Phone book].
4
From the [Tools] menu, select [Export].
5
On the [Export to file] dialog box,
specify where to save the file.
6
Enter a name for the file in [File name]
and then click [Save].
 The operation can be continued if a definition file is not
specified. If the definition file is not specified, select
whether to save a new definition file on the dialog box
displayed in the step 6.
5
Click [Next].
6
The data of the phone book is exported as a CSV
file in which entries are put in display order, being
separated with a comma. The name comes first,
followed by the fax number and comment.
Associate the definition you are
importing with that of the phone book
and then click [OK].
7
Select [Save] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
7
Close the phone book.
8
Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
8
Copy the created file to another
computer.
9
Select [Exit] from the [FAX Number]
menu.
- 35 -
3. Scanning
This chapter explains your machine's useful Scan functions.
 Advanced Operations for Scanning to E-mail
This section explains useful operations for scanning to e-mail.
Memo
 The following procedures are explained under the assumption that [Continue Scan] is disabled. For the basic procedures when
[Continue Scan] is enabled, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Creating Templates
You can record up to five templates with various
subject lines and body text.
You can set the e-mail address from which emails are sent and the address to which
responses are sent.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select the [Admin
Setup] and then press
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press the
OK
.
OK
OK
9
Press the
to select the [Admin
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
Press the
Press the
then press
to select [From] or [Reply
OK
8
.
10 Select [Enter] and then press
OK
.
until the top screen appears.
9
OK
.
to select [Scanner Setup]
OK
.
to select [E-mail Setup]
OK
.
to select [Template] and
OK
.
Make sure that [Edit Subject] is
selected and then press
When [Reply to] is selected in the step 8, select a
method to enter a destination and specify a
destination. Proceed to the step 11.
.
Enter the administrator password.
7
.
OK
3
and then press
Enter e-mail addresses.
11 Press the
2
6
.
to] and then press
Press the <SETTING> key.
and then press
to select [From/Reply to]
and then press
8
.
to select [E-mail Setup]
and then press
7
OK
1
Setup] and then press
to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press
6
Registering a Subject
Press the
press
OK
OK
.
to select a number and then
.
10 Enter the subject up to 80 characters.
11 Select [Enter] and then press
12 Press the
Memo
 Select an e-mail address from the address book.
- 36 -
OK
.
until the top screen appears.
Scanning
Setting Sender and Reply to
Addresses (From/Reply to)
3
Advanced Operations for Scanning to E-mail
Registering Body Text
1
Perform steps 1 to 7 in "Registering a
Subject" P. 36.
2
Press the
then press
3
Press the
press
OK
to select [Edit Body] and
OK
.
to select a number and then
.
4
Enter the body text up to 256 characters.
5
Select [Enter] and then press
6
Press the
OK
.
until the top screen appears.
Using a Template
You can use the templates recorded in "Creating
Templates" P. 36 or standardized e-mails.
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <SCAN> key.
3
Make sure that [E-mail] is selected and
then press
4
Press the
OK
.
to select [Scan setting]
and then press
5
Press the
then press
6
Press the
OK
.
to select [Edit E-mail] and
OK
.
to select [Subject] or
[Email body] and then press
7
OK
Make sure that [Select Subject] or [Select
Text] is selected and then press
8
Press the
Press the
.
OK
.
to select [Add Destination]
and then press
10 Press the
OK
to select a subject or text
and then press
9
.
OK
.
to select an entry method
and then press
OK
.
11 Specify a destination and then press
12 Press
MONO
or
COLOR
OK
.
.
- 37 -
Advanced Operations for Scanning and Internet Faxing
 Advanced Operations for Scanning and Internet
Faxing
This section explains useful operations for scanning and internet faxing. You can configure the scan and
internet fax functions to alter the output to suit your needs. The scan to local PC and the scan to remote
PC cannot be used for the following functions.
In this section, the procedures are explained from scan menu as an example. If you use the internet fax
function, each setting can be configured from the [Scan Setting] menu on the [Internet FAX
Standby] screen.
3
Memo
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Reference
For details on how to start a scan job, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Changing the Resolution
(Document Type)
Specifying the File Name
You can specify the file name of scanned
documents.
1
You can change to the appropriate resolution to
scan your document to get optimum image
quality.
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press OK .
If you select [USB memory], go to step 3.
2
Press the
to select [Scan setting]
and then press OK .
3
Press the
then press
1
Enter a file name up to 64 characters.
5
Select [Enter] and then press
OK
2
3
4
to select [Image Settings]
Press the
OK
.
5
Press the
press
OK
OK
.
to select [Document Type]
and then press
OK
.
to select a type and then
.
Memo
 Scanning takes longer in [Photo] mode.
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press OK .
Adjusting the Density
(Density)
If you select [USB memory], go to step 3.
Press the
press OK .
.
proceed to the step 5 after pressing
You can specify the appropriate scan size for your
document.
4
Press the
OK
For the internet fax, select [Resolution] and
Changing the Scan Size (Scan
Size)
Make sure that [Scan Size] is selected
and then press OK .
.
to select [Scan setting]
and then press
Memo
3
Press the
and then press
.
Make sure that [Scan setting] is
selected and then press OK .
OK
If you select [USB memory], go to step 3.
 If you do not specify the file name, the name specified by
the factory default settings is used.
2
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press
to select [File Name] and
OK
.
4
1
Scanning

You can adjust the density to seven levels.
1
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press
OK
If you select [USB memory], go to step 3.
to select a value and then
2
Press the
to select [Scan setting]
and then press
- 38 -
OK
.
.
Advanced Operations for Scanning and Internet Faxing
3
Press the
to select [Image Settings]
and then press
OK
.
For the internet fax, select [Density] and proceed
to the step 5 after pressing
4
.
Make sure that [Density] is selected and
then press
5
OK
Press the
OK
.
or
OK
.
Memo
 [0] is the standard value. To darken the document image,
select [+1], [+2] or [+3] (most dense). Conversely, to
lighten the document image, select [-1], [-2] or [-3]
(least dense).
Specifying the File Format
Note
 [Encrypted PDF] is displayed only when [PDF] is set to
any of [Color], [Mono (Grayscale)] and [Mono
(Binary)] of [File Format].
 To encrypt PDF, it is necessary to set a password to open a
document or authentication password.
Note
 This function is only for scanning. Internet FAX cannot be
used.
Setting a password for opening a
document and authentication
password
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press
OK
.
If you select [USB memory], go to step 3.
2
Press the
to select [Scan setting]
and then press
3
Press the
then press
4
5
OK
then press
Memo
.
 This section uses both a password to open a document and
authentication password for setting as an example.
to select [File Format] and
OK
.
Press the
to select the type of color
from [Color], [Mono (Grayscale)], or
[Mono (Binary)] and then press OK .
Press the
Authentication password is a password to control
operations including printing, extracting and
editing encrypted PDF. It can not be the same
with the password to open a document. The
password should be up to 32 1-byte characters.
 This function is only for scanning. You cannot use this
function for internet faxing.
You can specify the file format of scanned
documents. You can select a file format from
PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS.
1
You can encrypt a scanned document. You can
set the encryption level, a password for opening
documents, an authentication password, and
permission for created PDF files with this
function.
A password for opening a document is password
to open an encrypted PDF. It cannot be the same
with the authentication password. The password
should be up to 32 1-byte characters.
to select a density
value and then press
Encrypting PDF
to select a file format and
OK
1
scan mode you want and then press
2
Press the
3
Press the
OK
.
to select [Scan setting]
and then press
OK
.
to select [Encrypted PDF]
and then press
.
Memo
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
OK
.
4
Press the
to select [Encrypt] from
[Not encrypt] and [Encrypt] and then
press OK .
5
Press the
to Select the encryption
level from [Low], [Medium] and [High]
and then press OK .
6
Press the
to select [Enable] from
[Disable], [Enable] and [Apply
Default Password] and then press
 If you selected [Mono (Binary)] in step 4, [JPEG]
cannot be selected.
Set a password for opening the document.
7
- 39 -
Press the
to enter the password.
OK
.
Advanced Operations for Scanning and Internet Faxing
8
Select [Enter] and then press
9
Re-enter the password.
10 Select [Enter] and then press
OK
OK
.
Use the default password
.
When [Use the default password] is selected
in the step 6 or 11 in "Setting a password for
opening a document and authentication
password" P. 39, you can use the default
password registered in advance.
11 Press the
to select [Enable] from
[Disable], [Enable] and [Apply
Default Password] and then press
OK
Use the procedures below to register the initial
password.
.
Set the authentication password.
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select the [Admin
Setup] and then press OK .
3
Enter the administrator password.
.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
16 Select the permission to print the
5
Press the
to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press OK .
- When the encryption level is set to [Low] in the
step 5, you can select [Not Allowed] or [High
resolution].
6
Press the
to select [Default
Settings] and then press OK .
- When the encryption level is set to [Middle] or
[High] in the step 5, you can select [Not Allowed]
[low resolution (150dpi)] or [High resolution].
7
Press the
to select [Encrypted PDF
Setting] and then press OK .
8
Press the
to select [Document Open
Password]/[Permissions Password]
and then press OK .
9
Enter a password up to 32 characters.
and then enter the password.
13 Select [Enter] and then press
OK
.
14 Re-enter the password.
15 Select [Enter] and then press
document and then press
OK
OK
.
17 Select the permission to copy the text
and object and then press
OK
.
18 Select the permission to change the PDF
file and then press
OK
.
- When the encryption level is set to [Low] in the
step 5, you can select [Not Allowed], [Allow To
Make A Comment], [Allow To Swap Page], or
[Allow all op. except pg extract.]
10 Select [Enter] and then press
11 Press the
- When the encryption level is set to [Medium] or
[High] in the step 5, you can select [Not Allowed],
[Allow To Make A Comment], [Allow Ins., Del.
or Rotate Page.], or [Allow all op. except pg
extract.]
19 Check the security settings and then
press
OK
.
Note
 The settings of each authentication in the steps 16 to 18
are displayed only when [Permissions Password] is set
for [Enable] or [Apply Default Password]
- 40 -
displayed.
OK
OK
.
.
until the top screen is
3
Scanning
1
12 Press the
Advanced Operations for Scanning and Internet Faxing
Setting the Compression Level
You can specify the appropriate compression
level.
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
1
scan mode you want and then press
OK
.
If you select [USB memory], go to step 3.
Press the
2
to select [Scan setting]
and then press
Press the
3
OK
.
to select the [Compression
Rate] and then press
OK
.
If you use the internet fax function, go to step 5.
Press the
4
to select the color type
(Color, Mono etc.) and then press
OK
.
Press the
to select the compression
level from [High], [Medium] or [Low]
and then press OK .
5
Memo
 If you select [Mono (Binary)], you can select a
compression level from [High], [Medium] or [Raw].
Setting the Grayscale
When Grayscale is enabled, data scanned by
is not black-and-white (binary) but
M
grayscale (255 tones).
ONO
Note
 This function is only for scanning. Internet FAX cannot be
used.
1
On the [Scan Menu] screen, select the
scan mode you want and then press
OK
.
If you select [USB memory], go to step 3.
2
Press the
to select [Scan setting]
and then press
3
Press the
Press the
press
OK
.
to select the [Grayscale]
and then press
4
OK
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
.
- 41 -
Using Drivers and Software
 Using Drivers and Software
This section explains how to use the scanner driver and utilities. They allow you to scan documents and
change settings easily on your computer.
7
Using TWAIN Driver
Click the scan buttons.
The scan job starts.
Memo
 The explanations in this section use PaperPort in Windows
and Adobe Photoshop CS3 in Mac OS X as an example.
3
Scanning
 In this section, procedures using Scan To Remote PC with
USB connection are described. For how to connect to the
network and start to scan by Scan To Local PC, refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
Note
 To use this function, applications supporting TWAIN
(PaperPort or Adobe Photoshop CS3, etc.) should be
installed in your computer.
Reference
 For details on how to start a scan job, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
8
Click [Quit].
 For details on how to install PaperPort, refer to "Installing
Utilities" P. 102.
9
When there is no continued page or the
back side is not scanned, click [Quit].
Starting a Scan Job (for Windows)
Memo
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <SCAN> key.
3
Press the
then press
to select [Remote PC] and
OK
.
4
Start PaperPort on your computer.
5
Click [Select] and then select the
scanner driver of the machine.
A window appears.
6
Click the [Scan].
 The following five buttons are registered as default
settings.
Scan Photograph
Scan Magazine
Scan for OCR
Scan for Internet
Customize
Changing Settings
You can adjust how the document is scanned by
changing the driver setting.
The following explains the setting items.
 Simple Mode
You can change the settings of five registered
buttons.
1
Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Windows)" through step 6.
2
Select [Simple] from [Mode].
- 42 -
Using Drivers and Software
3
Click [Settings].
5
A window appears.
Select [Import] from [File] and then
select [OKI MC351_361_561 Twain]
or [OKI MC351_361_561 Twain
Network].
- When [OKI MC351_361_561 Twain] is selected,
proceed to the step 9.
- When [OKI MC351_361_561 Twain Network] is
selected, the network scan is the second or later
time, proceed to the step 9.
4
Click the scan button to change the
settings.
5
Click [OK].
6
If you start a scan job, click the scan
button.
6
For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool for selecting a
connection destination is started is
displayed. Then, click [OK].
7
On the dialog box of [Scan Settings],
select a connection destination to
register host information if necessary,
and then click [OK].
8
Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 and select [OKI
MC351_361_561 Twain Network].
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
The windows appears.
 Advanced Mode
9
You can adjust in detail how a document is
scanned.
1
Click the scan button.
Scanning starts.
Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Windows)" P. 42 through step 6.
10 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
2
Select [Advanced] from [Mode].
3
Change the settings if necessary.
4
Click [Scan] to start scanning.
You can adjust how the document is scanned by
changing the driver setting.
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
The following explains the setting items.
Changing Settings (for Macintosh)
 Simple Mode
Reference
 For details on how to change each setting, refer to the
online help.
You can change the settings of five registered
buttons.
Starting a Scan Job (for Mac OS X)
1
Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3
Press the
then press
4
1
Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Mac OS X)" through step 8.
2
Select [Simple] from [Mode].
3
Click [Settings].
A window appears.
4
Click the scan button to change the
settings.
5
Click [OK].
6
If you start a scan job, click the scan
button.
to select [Remote PC] and
OK
.
Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
- 43 -
Using Drivers and Software
 Advanced Mode
12 When there is no continued page or the
back side is not scanned, click [Finish].
You can adjust in detail how a document is
scanned.
The scanned image is displayed in PaperPort.
1
Follow the procedure for "Starting a Scan
Job (for Mac OS X)" P. 43 through step 8.
2
Select [Advanced] from [Mode].
3
Change the settings if necessary.
4
Click [Scan] to start scanning.
Using Windows FAX and Scan
"Windows FAX and Scan" is a function used in
Windows 7.
1
If you want to finish the setting, click [Quit].
The WIA driver does not support the network
scan function. Connect the machine with the
coumber via USB.
2
Press the <SCAN> key.
3
Press the
then press
The WIA driver does not support Mac OS X.
The WIA 2.0 driver supports Windows 7/
Windows Server 2008 R2.
The WIA 1.0 driver supports Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2008/ Windows XP/ Windows
Server 2003.
Starting a Scan Job
to select [Remote PC] and
OK
.
4
Click [Start] on your computer, and
select [All Programs]> [Windows FAX
and Scan].
5
Click [New Scan].
6
Select [MC351/361/561] and click
[OK].
7
Make additional setting if necessary.
8
Click [Scan].
9
Exit [Windows FAX and Scan].
Memo
 The explanations in this section use PaperPort as an
example, and may differ from the description depending
on your application.
1
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
2
Press the <SCAN> key.
3
Press the
then press
to select [Remote PC] and
OK
.
4
Start PaperPort on your computer.
5
Click [Select] and then click
[WIA:MC351/361/561].
6
Click [Scan].
7
Select a paper feeding method.
8
Select a document type.
9
Specify the area to be scanned.
10 Click [Scan].
11 Click [Cancel] when scanning is finished.
- 44 -
3
Scanning
Using WIA Driver
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
Using Drivers and Software
Using ActKey Software
Using the ActKey, you can start a scan job in
specified settings with a click a button.
8
Repeat steps 6 and 7 so that [ActKey] is
set to all events.
9
Click [OK].
Fax Transmission of Scanned
Documents
Memo
 ActKey does not support Mac OS X.
 When ActKey is installed, Network Configuration is also
installed simultaneously. For Network Configuration, refer
to "Using Network Configuration" P. 46.
Using the fax service of the Windows component,
you can send a scanned document.
Reference
Note
 For details on how to start a scan job, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
 The direction to load the paper can not be changed after
scanning the documents.
 This function uses the fax service of the Windows
component.
Installing the Software
1
Memo
Insert the "Software CD-ROM" into your
computer.
 For PC-FAX function, the resolution is fixed to 200dpi and
the color mode is fixed to black and white.
A window opens.
2
Select [ActKey] from [Optional
Software].
3
Install the software as instructed.
4
Click [Finish].
Start ActKey on your computer.
2
Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel of the machine.
3
Press the
then press
Starting the Software
1
1
Click [Start] to select [All Programs] >
[Okidata] > [ActKey] > [ActKey].
to select [Remote PC] and
OK
.
4
Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
5
Click [PC-Fax] on your computer.
The [Fax Setup] starts.
Starting ActKey when Scanning to a
Local PC
6
You can set ActKey to start when you select
[Local PC] on the machine.
Setting the Scan Button
1
Click [Start] to select [Control Panel].
2
Enter [View scanners and cameras] in
[Search for Operator panel].
3
Click the [View scanners and cameras]
under [Devices and Printers].
4
Select [MC351/361/561] and click
[Properties].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
5
Click the [Events] tab.
6
Select an event for [Select an event].
7
Select the [Start this program] check
box and then select [ActKey].
Follow the on-screen instructions to send
a fax.
You can change the settings of four scan buttons.
1
Start ActKey.
2
Select [Button settings] from
[Options] menu.
3
Click a button you want to set.
4
Change the settings if necessary.
5
Click [OK].
- 45 -
Using Drivers and Software
Using Network Configuration
 Method to set Scan To Local PC
Network Configuration is a tool to set in advance
when executing Scan To Local PC. In addition, if
the information including the device and IP
address of the computer, etc. is changed when
performing network scan, the setting value can
be changed by this tool.
When installing ActKey, Network Configuration is
also installed simultaneously.
Network Configuration will be automatically
attached to the taskbar when you restart your
computer.
After installing the scanner driver, start Network
Configuration and select the driver to be used.
Then, select [Properties] form the [Scanner]
menu and select the [Register] tab. As the
computer information, the computer name, IP
address and port number are displayed. The
computer name does not have to be set since the
computer's host name is automatically acquired.
Although the setting value of the computer is
automatically displayed for the IP address, if
multiple network cards are installed in the
computer, multiple IP addresses are displayed.
Select the IP address of the network card
currently used. Further more, for the port
number, the current setting is displayed. If you
need to change, change the setting.
After all settings are complete. Click [Register]
button to register the setting in the machine.
 Method to change a scanner driver
name
When a scanner driver name has been changed,
select [Edit Driver Name] from the [Scanner]
menu and then change the scanner driver name.
If the machine is tuned off and cannot be
connected, an error occurs when registering.
After registering, if the computer's name, IP
address or port number is changed, you need to
register again with the above procedure.
 Method to change the setting
information of the machine
When the IP address of the machine and port
number of the machine have been changed, start
Network Configuration and then select [Edit
Scanner] from the [Scanner] menu.
The setting value set in the current computer is
displayed, and then change the IP address and
port number of the machine.
- 46 -
3
Scanning
When starting Network Configuration, the scanner
driver installed in the computer is displayed.
To execute Scan To Local PC, you need to register
the computer name, IP address and port number
in the machine.
Useful Functions for Internet Faxing and Scan To E-mail
 Useful Functions for Internet Faxing and Scan To
E-mail
This section explains useful functions for the internet fax and scan to e-mail function.
MDN is a message to notify the sender about the status after the recipient has received the document.
DSN is a message to notify the sender about the delivery status if the transmitted document has
reached the recipient.
If the machine receives a DSN request, it will not send a response.
Memo
 To enter [Admin Setup] menu, a password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Note
 To receive response from MDN or DSN, enable the setting of MDN and DSN requests, and make email reception settings in
advance.
Reference
 For the reception setting of emails, refer to "Configuring Server to Print Files Attached to E-mails" P. 171.
Enabling MDN and DSN
Requests
Enabling MDN Response
Do the following operation to transmit the MDN
response when the machine receives MDN
requests.
Do the following procedure to request MDN and
DSN when you transmit internet faxes and
emails.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
OK
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
then press
8
Press the
press
9
OK
OK
.
OK
OK
.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
.
6
Press the
7
.
Press the
Press the
press
to select [ON] and then
9
until the top screen appears.
- 47 -
OK
OK
.
OK
.
to select [MDN Response]
and then press
8
.
to select [E-mail Setup]
and then press
.
OK
to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press
.
Press the
OK
Enter the administrator password.
to select [MCF Report] and
OK
to select [Admin Setup] and
3
to select [E-mail Setup]
and then press
Press the
Press the
to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press
7
2
then press
.
3
Press the
Press the <SETTING> key.
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
6
1
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
.
Press the
until the top screen appears.
Useful Functions for Scanning to Local and Remote PCs
 Useful Functions for Scanning to Local and
Remote PCs
This section explains useful functions for scanning to local and remote PCs.
Memo
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, a password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Setting PC Scan Mode
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
OK
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
Press the
Press the
press
9
OK
OK
OK
OK
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
.
.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
6
Press the
OK
.
OK
.
Make sure that [Network TWAIN] is
selected and then press
8
Press the
press
9
- 48 -
.
to select [TWAIN Setup]
and then press
7
OK
to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press
until the top screen appears.
.
Enter the administrator password.
.
to select a mode and then
OK
3
.
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
to select [PC Scan Mode]
and then press
8
.
to select [TWAIN Setup]
and then press
7
OK
 If you select [Disable] on this function, you cannot use
scan to local PC and scan to remote PC via network.
to select [Scanner Setup]
and then press
Press the
Note
.
3
6
Do the following procedure to use scan to the
local PC and scan to remote PC functions
connecting to network.
OK
OK
.
to select [ON] and then
.
Press the
until the top screen appears.
3
Scanning
You can select either simple scan mode or secure
scan mode for scanning to local PC function.
Enabling the Network TWAIN
Settings
4. Printing
This chapter explains advanced printing operations.
 Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
This section explains useful operations when you print a document from a computer.
Memo
 The display and procedure may differ according to the operating system, the applications, and the version of the printer driver
you are using. This section uses Wordpad and TextEdit in Windows and Mac OS X as examples.
Reference
 For additional information on the setting items on the printer driver, refer to its online help.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
Manual Printing
You can print a document feeding paper
manually on the MP tray. The machine prints on a
sheet of paper at a time. Every time a page is
printed, a message appears requesting to load
paper on the MP tray. Select [Restart printing]
on the message to continue to print.
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2
Click [Preferences].
3
Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
4
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] from
[Paper Source].
1
Load paper on the MP tray.
2
Open the file you want to print.
5
Click [Advanced].
3
Configure the print settings on the
printer driver and start printing.
6
Click [Multipurpose tray is handled as
manual feed] and select [Yes] from the
drop-down list.
7
Click [OK].
8
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing on the print dialog.
9
If a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the
MP tray, press
or
to select [Restart
printing] and then press OK .
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2
Click [Preferences].
3
On the [Setup] tab, select [Multi
Purpose Tray] from [Source].
4
Click [Paper Feed Options].
5
Select the [Use MP tray as manual
feed] check box and then click [OK].
For Mac OS X Printer Driver
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
7
When a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the
MP tray, press the
or
to select
[Restart printing] and then press OK .
2
Select [Paper Feed] from the panel
menu.
3
Select [All] and then select [MultiPurpose Tray].
4
Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
- 49 -
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
5
6
Select [Paper Feeding Option] from
[Feature Sets].
6
Select [Multipurpose tray is treated
as manual feed] check box.
7
then press
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
8
When a request message appears on the
operator panel for loading paper on the MP
tray, press the
or
to select [Restart
printing] and then press OK .
If you print a document of multiple pages, every
time a page is printed the same message appears.
Set the paper size of MP tray on the operator
panel, and then make print settings including
paper size and paper tray with the printer driver.
 Envelopes should be loaded with the address side up.
Press the
appears.
9
Open the file you want to print on the
computer.
and orientation on the printer driver and
then start printing.
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2
Click [Preferences].
3
On the [Setup] tab, select any of
[Envelope*] from [Size].
* Select a type of envelope.
4
Select [Multi Purpose Tray] from
[Source].
5
Select the [Job Options] tab.
6
Select orientation at [Orientation].
- Select [Portrait] for Chou envelopes.
- Select [Landscape] for You envelopes.
7
Memo
 Do not select duplex printing on envelopes.
Reference
 For available envelopes refer to the User's Manual Basic.
 Manual printing is also available for printing on envelopes.
For details on manual printing, refer to "Manual Printing" P. 49.
4
Press the
press
5
OK
to select [Paper] and then
.
Press the
then press
to select [MP tray] and
OK
until the top screen
10 Configure the paper size, paper source
- You envelopes (Monarch, Com-9, Com-10, DL, C5)
should be loaded so that the flap is on the right side to
the feeding direction.
Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
.
8
Note
 Warp or creasing may appear after printing. Make sure
that there is no problem by test printing.
3
OK
.
- 50 -
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
4
Printing
You can print on envelopes by changing the
paper size setting, and using the MP tray and the
face up stacker.
Open the face up stacker at the rear of
the machine.
to select any of
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
Printing on Envelopes
2
.
*Select a type of envelope.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 and 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
Load paper on the MP tray and then
press the set button.
Press the
OK
[Envelope*] and then press
7
1
Make sure [Paper Size] is selected and
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2
Click [Preferences].
3
On the [Layout] tab, select orientation
from [Orientation].
Printing on Labels
You can print on labels by changing the media
type setting, and using the MP tray and the faceup stacker.
Set the paper size and type for MP tray on the
operator panel. Then, make print settings
including paper size and paper tray with the
printer driver.
- Select [Portrait] for Chou envelopes.
- Select [Landscape] for You envelopes. Click
[Preferences] and select [Rotation] for [180°]
on the advanced option screen.
4
Memo
 Do not select duplex printing on labels.
Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
Reference
 For available labels, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
5
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] from
[Source].
6
Click [Advanced].
1
7
Click [Paper Size] and select any of
[Envelope*] from the drop-down list.
Load paper on the MP tray and then
press the set button.
2
Open the face up stacker at the rear of
the machine.
 Manual printing is also available for printing on labels. For
details on manual printing, refer to "Manual Printing" P. 49.
* Select a type of envelope.
8
Click [OK].
3
9
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
4
Press the
press
For Mac OS X Printer Driver
5
From the [File] menu, select [Page
Setup].
2
Select any of [Envelope*] from [Paper
Size].
6
8
- Select [Portrait] for Chou envelopes, and check
the checkbox of [180°] in the [Job Options]
function set on the [Printer Features] panel.
Select [Paper Feed] from the panel
menu.
6
7
.
OK
Make sure [Media Type] is selected and
.
OK
Press the
Press the
then press
9
- Select [Landscape] for You envelopes.
5
to select [MP tray] and
to select [A4] or [Letter]
and then press
Select orientation from [Orientation]
and then click [OK].
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
Press the
then press
7
* Select a type of envelope.
4
.
then press
1
3
OK
to select [Paper] and then
10 Press the
.
to select [Paper Type] and
.
OK
Press the
then press
OK
to select the [Labels] and
OK
.
until the top screen
appears.
11 Open the file you want to print on the
computer.
Select [All] and then select [MultiPurpose Tray].
12 Configure the paper size and tray on the
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
- 51 -
printer driver.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
Printing on Custom Size Paper
You can register a customized paper size on the
printer driver so you can print on nonstandard
paper such as banners.
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2
Click [Preferences].
3
Select [A4] or [Letter] from [Size] on
the [Setup] tab.
Width: 64 to 215.9mm
4
Select [Multi Purpose Tray] from
[Source].
Paper size that can be fed is different depending
on a tray.
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
 Settable custom size range
Length: 127 to 1320.8mm
Note
 Register a paper size and load paper in portrait
orientation.
 For banner media that is over 356 mm long, use the face
up stacker.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
4
 This function may not be available in some applications.
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
2
Click [Preferences].
3
Select [Paper/Quality] tab.
4
Select [Multi-Purpose Tray] from
[Paper Feed Source].
5
Click [Advanced].
6
Click [Paper Size] and then select [A4]
or [Letter] from the drop-down list.
 If paper length exceeds 356mm, we do not guarantee
print quality.
 If paper is so long that it exceeds the paper supports of
the MP tray, support it by hand.
 When using tray 1 or tray 2, select the <SETTING> key
on the operator panel>[Paper]>[Tray 1] or [Tray 2]>
[Paper Size]>[Custom] before doing the following
procedure.
 When image is not correctly printed on large size paper in
the PS printer driver, by selecting [Standard
(600x600dpi)] for [Print Quality], image may be
correctly printed.
 It is not recommended to use paper whose with is less
than 100mm since it may cause paper jams.
7
Click [OK].
8
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Reference
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
 For details on the paper sizes that can be fed on each tray,
that can be used for duplex printing, or that can be
registered for custom paper sizes, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
 The [Auto Tray Change] check box is selected by default.
When the tray runs out of paper during printing, the
machine automatically locates another tray and begins
feeding paper from that tray. If you want to feed custom
paper only from a particular tray, clear the [Auto Tray
Change] check box. For auto tray change, refer to "Auto
Tray Switching" P. 60.
1
From the [File] menu, select [Page
Setup].
2
Select [A4] or [Letter] from [Paper
Size].
3
Select [Print] from [File] menu.
4
Select [Feed Paper] from the panel menu.
1
5
Select [All] and then select [MultiPurpose Tray].
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561(PCL)].
3
On the [Setup] tab, click [Paper Feed
Options].
4
Click [Custom Size].
6
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
- 52 -
Printing
1
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
5
Enter a name and the dimensions.
2
Click a printer icon in [Printers and
Faxes] and then click [Print server
properties] on the top bar.
3
Select the [Forms] tab.
4
Select the [Create a new form] check
box.
5
Enter the values in the [Form name],
[Paper size], and [Printer area
margins]. Click [Save Form].
6
Click [Close].
7
Open the file you want to print from the
application.
8
Select the registered paper size and start
printing on the printer driver.
a) Enter a name for the new size in the
[Name] box.
b) Enter its dimensions in the [Width] and
[Length] boxes.
6
Click [Add] to save the custom paper
size to the list and then click [OK].
You can save up to 32 custom sizes.
7
Press [OK] until the [Printing
Preferences] dialog box is closed.
8
Open the file you want to print.
9
Select the registered paper size and start
printing on the print dialog.
Reference
 For how to specify paper in the printer driver, refer to
User's Manual Basic.
Reference
 For how to specify paper in the printer driver, refer to
User's Manual Basic.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561(PS)].
 In the Mac OS X PS printer driver, paper size out of the
available range can be set, however, image is not correctly
printed. set paper size within available range.
3
On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
1
Open the file you want to print.
4
Click [Paper Size] and select
[PostScript Custom Page Size] from
the drop-down list.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Page
Setup].
5
Enter the dimensions in the [Width] and
[Height] boxes, and press [OK].
3
Select [Manage Custom Sizes] from
[Paper Size]
4
Click [+] to add an item to the list of
custom paper sizes.
Note
Note
 [Offset for Paper Feeder Size] is not available.
6
Press [OK] until the [Print Setup]
dialog box is closed.
5
Double-click [Untitled] and enter a
name for the custom paper size.
7
Open the file you want to print from the
application.
6
Enter the dimensions in the [Width] and
[Height] boxes.
8
Select [PostScript Custom Page Size]
for a paper size and start printing on the
printer driver.
7
Click [OK].
8
Click [OK].
9
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
Reference
10 Configure other settings if necessary and
 For how to specify paper in the printer driver, refer to
User's Manual Basic.
then start printing.
For Windows PCL XPS Printer Driver
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
- 53 -
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
Combining Multiple Pages
Onto One Sheet of Paper
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Layout] from the panel menu.
 This function scales down the page size of your document
for printing. The center of the printed image may not be in
the center of the paper.
4
Select the number of pages to print on
each sheet from [Pages per Sheet]
 This function may not be available in some applications.
5
Specify each setting at [Border] and
[Layout Direction].
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
You can print multiple pages of a document onto
a single side of a sheet of paper.
Note
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Setup] tab, select the number of
pages to print on each sheet at
[Finishing Mode].
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
5
Click [Options].
 Paper size that can be used for duplex printing
6
Specify each setting at [Page Borders],
[Page layout], and [Bind Margin], and
then click [OK].
7
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Making Duplex Prints
A4, A5, B5, Letter, Legal13, Legal 13.5, Legal 14,
Executive, 16K (197x273mm, 195x270mm,
184x260mm) Custom size
A6 can not be used for duplex printing.
 Media weight that can be used for duplex printing
64~176g/m2
Using media weight other than the above causes
paper jams, therefore do not use.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Layout] tab, select the number
of pages to print on each sheet from
[Pages per Sheet].
5
Note
 When performing duplex printing with the face-up stacker
opened, the message indicating that the face-up stacker
should be closed on the display of the operator panel.
At this moment, by closing the face-up stacker, you can
restart printing.
 This function may not be available in some applications.
Memo
 The width and length of custom size that can be used for
duplex printing are as follows.
Specify the following settings.
- Select the [Draw Borders] 
- Width: 148 to 216mm (5.8 to 8.5 inch)
check box to draw borders between pages on each
sheet.
- Length: 210 to 356mm (8.3 to 14.0 inch)
1
Check that the face-up stacker on the
rear size of the machine is closed.
2
Make print settings for duplex printing
with the printer driver of the computer
and then start printing.
- Select [Advanced]>[Page per Sheet Layout]
to set the layout of pages on each sheet.
Note
 [Draw Borders] and [Page per Sheet Layout] are
not available with Windows Server 2003, Windows XP,
and Windows 2000.
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
- 54 -
4
Printing
1
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
Scaling to Pages
You can print data formatted for one size page
onto a different size page without modifying the
print data.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Setup] tab, select [Long Edge]
or [Short Edge] from [2-Sided
Printing].
Note
5
 This function may not be available in some applications.
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
 This function is not available with the Windows PS printer
driver.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
1
Open the file you want to print.
3
Click [Preferences].
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
4
3
Click [Preferences].
On the [Setup] tab, click [Paper Feed
Options].
4
On the [Layout] tab, select [Flip on
Long Edge] or [Flip on Short Edge]
from [Print on Both Sides].
5
Select the [Resize document to fit
printer page] check box in [Fit to
Page].
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
6
Select a scaling value from
[Conversion] and click [OK].
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
1
Open the file you want to print.
3
Select [Layout] from the panel menu.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
4
Select [Long-Edge binding] or [ShortEdge binding] from [Two-Sided] on
the [Layout] panel.
3
Select [Paper Handling] from the panel
menu.
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
4
Select the [Scale to fit paper size]
check box.
5
Select the paper size you want to use
from [Output Paper Size].
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
- 55 -
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
Collating Pages
Setting the Page Order
You can print copies of multiple sets of a
multipage document.
You can set whether pages are printed in forward
or reverse order to suit your needs.
If you want pages to be stacked in numeric order,
forward order is usually appropriate with the face
down stacker, and reverse order with the face up
stacker.
Note
 This function may not be available in some applications.
 Turn off the page collating mode in the application when
you use this function with the Windows PS printer driver.
If using a face-up stacker, set the printing to run
in the reverse order to stack the paper in the
order of the pages.
For Windows Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
Note
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
 If the face up stacker is not opened, pages are output on
the face down stacker.
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Select a number of copies to print from
the [Copies] scrolling list and select
the[Collate] check box.
6
For Windows PS Printer Driver
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Uncheck the checkbox of [Collate] and
enter a number of copies to print in
[Copies].
Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
5
Select [Job Options] from [Feature
Set].
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Layout] tab, select [Front to
Back] or [Back to Front] from [Page
Order].
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
For Mac OS X 10.3.9 to 10.4.11, uncheck the
checkbox of [Collate] on the [Number of
printed copies and printed pages] and enter a
number of printed copies in [Copies].
4
1
6
Check the checkbox of [Collate].
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
 If [Page Order] does not appear, click [Start]>[Devices
and Printers]> right-click the OKI MC561 icon > select
[Printer properties]>[OKI MC561(PS)]>[Advanced]
>[Enable advanced printing features].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Paper Handling] from the panel
menu.
4
Select [Normal] or [Reverse] from
[Page Order] on the [Paper Handling]
panel.
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
 Check the [Collate] box to print without using the printer
memory.
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
- 56 -
4
Printing
2
 Reverse order is not available with the Windows PCL/PCL
XPS printer driver.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
5
Booklet Printing
You can print multipage documents with their
pages ordered and arranged so that the final
printed output can be folded into a booklet.
Memo
 When you want to make an A5 booklet using A4 sheets,
select [A4] for the paper size.
Note
 This function may not be available in some applications.
 This function is not available with Mac OS X printer driver.
 Watermarks are not printed properly with this function.
 This function is not available when executing encrypted
authentication printing from the client computer that
shares the machine in the network by the print server.
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Setup] tab, select [Booklet] at
[Finishing Mode].
5
 When making a booklet whose right side is bound (The
right side is bound when the first page is the front), click
[Advanced] on the [Layout] tab and select [Right edge]
for [Booklet binding].
[Booklet binding] can not be used in Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/ Windows 2000.
 If you cannot use this function, click [Start]>[Devices
and Printers]> right-click the OKI MC561 icon > select
[Printer properties]>[OKI MC561(PS)]>[Advanced]>
select the [Enable advanced printing features] check
box.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Cover Printing
You can feed the first page of a print job from
one tray and the remaining pages from another
tray. This function is useful when you want to use
a kind of paper for a cover and another for body
pages.
Note
Click [Options] and then set the booklet
print options if necessary.
 This function is not available with the Windows PS printer
driver.
- [Signature]: Specify the number of pages per
side of each sheet of paper.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
- [Right to Left] Print the booklet to be opened
toward the right hand.
1
Open the file you want to print.
6
Click [OK].
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Setup] tab, click [Paper Feed
Options].
5
Select the [Use different source for
first page] check box.
6
Select a source tray from [Source] and
click [OK].
Memo
 When you want to make an A5 booklet using A4 sheets,
select [A4] for the paper size.
 When you cannot select this function, click [Start]>
[Devices and Printers]> right-click the OKI MC561 icon
> select [Printer properties]>[OKI MC561 (PCL)]>
[Advanced]>[Print Processor]>[OPLAPP3]>[OK].
If necessary, select a paper weight from the
[Weight] drop-down list.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
7
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Layout] tab, select [Booklet] at
[Page Format].
If you want to print boarder lines, select the
[Draw Borders] check box to draw borders.
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Paper Feed] from the panel
menu.
- 57 -
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
4
5
Select [First Page From] and select
source trays for the first page and the
remaining pages.
Changing Print Quality
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
You can change the print quality to suit your
needs.
Memo
 [Normal (600X600)] may produce better results for
printing on a larger size of paper with the PS printer driver.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
For Windows Printer Driver
Poster Printing
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Select a print quality level at [Quality].
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Note
 This function is not available with the Windows PS printer
driver and the Mac OS X PS printer driver.
 This function is not available when you use a NetBEUI or
IPP network.
 This function is invalid when you use the encrypted secure
printing mode from a client computer sharing the machine
with a print server.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4
Select [Job Options] from [Feature
Sets].
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
5
4
On the [Setup] tab, select
[PosterPrint] at [Finishing Mode].
Select a print quality level from [Print
Quality].
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
5
Click [Options].
6
Set values for [Enlarge], [Add
Registration Marks], or [Add
Overlap] if necessary and press [OK].
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
Memo
 When making a poster of A3 size using two A4 sheets,
select [A4] for paper size and select [2] for [Enlarge].
 If you cannot select this function, click [Start]>[Devices
and Printers]> right-click the OKI MC561 icon > select
[Printer properties] > [OKI MC561(PCL)]>
[Advanced]>[Print Processor]>[OPLAPP3]>[OK].
- 58 -
4
Printing
You can print a poster by dividing a single
document into parts and printing it onto multiple
sheets of paper. Each part is enlarged and
printed on separate sheets of paper. You can then
combine the separate sheets to create a poster.
1
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
Enhancing Photos
You can print photographs more vividly.
Note
 This function is not available with the Windows PS printer
driver and the Mac OS X PS printer driver.
 This function is not available when [File]>[Print]>[OKI
MC561 (PCL)]>[Preferences]>[Color] tab >[Office
Document] check box is selected with the Windows PCL
printer driver.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4
Select [Image Option] from [Feature
Sets].
5
Select the [Adjust ultra fine lines]
check box.
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Select the [Photo enhance] check box.
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Emphasizing Fine Lines
Auto Tray Selection
You can switch paper feed trays with the same
size of paper configured on the printer driver
automatically.
First, set MP tray to be a target tray for auto
selection on the operator panel. Then, set the
auto selection of the tray with the printer driver.
You can print fine lines and small characters
clearer.
Note
Memo
 Make sure to set a paper size for Tray1, Tray2 (optional)
and MP tray. Available paper size differs depending on
each tray. For details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
 This function is turned on by default.
 With some applications, if this function is turned on, the
spaces in bar codes may become too narrow. If this
happens, turn off this function.
Memo
 In the default settings, the [MP tray Usage] is [Not
Used]. In such a case, MP tray is not supported by the
auto tray switching function.
For Windows Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, an administrator
password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
1
3
Click [Preferences].
Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
2
Press the
5
Click the [Advanced].
6
Select the [Adjust ultra fine lines]
check box and then click [OK].
7
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
OK
.
Make sure that [Print menu] is selected
and then press
- 59 -
.
to select [Printer
Functions] and then press
6
OK
OK
.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
7
Make sure that [Tray Configuration] is
selected and then press
OK
.
8
Press the
to select [MP Tray Usage]
and then press OK .
9
Press the
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
Auto Tray Switching
to select [When
Mismatching] and then press
10 Press the
OK
.
You can switch paper feed trays automatically.
until the top screen appears.
11 Specify a paper tray on the printer driver
and start printing.
When the tray runs out of paper while printing,
the machine locates another tray with the same
size of paper configured on the printer driver and
begins feeding paper from that tray.
This function is effective for large print jobs.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
First, set MP tray to be a target tray for auto
switching on the operator panel. Then, set the
auto switching of the tray with the printer driver.
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Setup] tab, select
[Automatically Select] from [Source].
Note
 Make sure to set the same values (paper size, media type,
media weight) for each tray used for auto tray switching.
Available paper size differs depending on each tray. For
details, refer to the User's Manual Basic.
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
Memo
 In the default settings, the [MP tray Usage] is [Not
Used]. In such a case, MP tray is not supported by the
auto tray switching function.
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, an administrator
password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Select [Automatically Select] from
[Paper Feed Source].
5
Press the
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
6
6
and then press
then press
.
OK
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Paper Feed] from the panel menu.
4
Select [All pages] and select [Auto Select].
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
8
Make sure that [Print menu] is selected
OK
.
Make sure that [Tray Configuration] is
Press the
Press the
OK
.
to select [MP Tray Usage]
and then press
9
.
.
selected and then press
1
OK
to select [Print Setup] and
and then press
7
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
OK
OK
.
to select [When
Mismatching] and then press
10 Press the
OK
.
until the top screen appears.
11 Configure the paper source setting on
the print dialog.
- 60 -
4
Printing
1
5
Memo
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Click [Paper Feed Options] on the
[Setup] tab.
5
Check the [Auto Tray Change] box and
then click [OK].
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Click [Advanced] on the [Layout] tab.
5
Click [Auto Tray Switch] under [Auto
Tray Switch] and select [Auto Tray
Switch] from the drop-down list.
Select [Error handling] from the panel
menu.
4
Select [Switch to another cassette
with the same paper size].
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Saving Toner
You can print your documents using less toner.
This function control the amount of toner by
brightening up the whole page image except the
areas that have 100% black.
Note
 This function is invalid for 100% black.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1
3
 This function is disabled when you use the grayscale
mode.
 This function is disabled in the following cases:
- configuring the CMYK colors in the PostScript
application.
- setting the grayscale mode in the PostScript application.
- using the application or operating system of CIE color.
Memo
 The density of the printed images with this function may
vary in degree, depending on the document being printed.
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
6
Click [OK].
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
 For Mac OS X 10.5 to 10.6
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select the [Color] tab.
5
Select the [Toner Save] check box.
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Printer Functions] from the
panel menu.
For Windows PCL X PS Printer Driver
4
Select [Paper Feed Options] from
[Function sets].
1
Open the file you want to print.
Check the [Auto Tray Switching] box.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
3
Click [Preferences].
6
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Select the [Toner Save] check box.
 For Mac OS X 10.3.9 to 10.4.11
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
- 61 -
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
6
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
6
Memo
 In the Windows PCL printer driver and the Windows PCL
XPS printer driver, you can select [Office Document] on
the [Color] tab which also controls the amount of toner as
well. The color density of the output image becomes lower
by using both of the toner save mode and the office
document mode.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
If you select the [Request Job Name for each
print job] check box, a prompt for the job name
appears when you send the print job to the
machine.
7
Click [OK].
8
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
The print job is sent to the machine, but is not
printed.
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
4
Select [Toner Saving] check box.
5
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
9
10 Press the
then press
11 Press the
then press
Memo
 If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see on the Mac OS X
10.5 or 10.6, click the disclosure triangle beside the
[Printer] menu.
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Select [Secure Print] at [Job Type].
.
to select [Stored Job] and
OK
.
OK
- Press the <CLEAR> key if you enter a wrong
number.
- Press the <STOP> key if you want to stop the job
search.
13 Make sure [Print] is selected and press
OK
.
If you select [Delete], you can cancel the print
job.
14 Enter the number of copies and then
press
Note
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
OK
the [Password] box and then press
to start a job searching.
You can assign a password to a print job so it can
only be printed if the password is input at the
operator panel.
OK
.
Note
 If you forget your password set for a job and do not print
the job transmitted to the machine, the job remains in the
SD memory card.
For how to delete the job stored in the SD memory card,
refer to "Delete Unwanted Jobs from an SD Memory Card"
P. 114.
- 62 -
4
to select [Print Job] and
12 Enter your password set in the step 6 in
Secure Printing (for MC561dn
Only)
 If there is not enough space on the SD memory card for
the spooled data, a message indicating the file system is
full appears and the print job does not start.
Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel.
Printing
1
In order to use this function, the machine must
be equipped with an SD memory card.
Enter a job name in the [Job Name] box
and a password in the [Job Password]
box.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
Encrypted Secure Printing (for
MC561dn Only)
You can encrypt your documents before sending
them from a computer to the machine.
Therefore, you can prevent unauthorized access
to confidential information.
7
Click [OK].
8
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
The print job is sent to the machine, but is not printed.
9
The document is unprinted and stored in an
encrypted format on the SD memory card in the
machine until you enter the registered password
at the operator panel.
The print job stored on the SD memory card is
automatically deleted after printing or if it is not
printed for more than a certain period of time. If
an error occurs when the data is sent or if an
unauthorized person is detected trying to access
the job, it is automatically deleted.
Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel.
10 Press the
then press
to select [Print Job] and
OK
11 Press the
.
to select [Encrypted Job]
and then press
OK
.
12 Enter the password you set in step 6 in the
[Password] box and then press
start a job searching.
OK
to
- Press the <CLEAR> key if you enter a wrong
number.
Note
 If there is not enough space on the SD memory card for
the spooled data, a message indicating the file system is
full appears and the print job does not start.
- Press the <STOP> key if you want to stop the job
search.
 This function is not available with printer drivers for the
64-bit editions of Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008,Windows Server
2003, and Windows XP.
13 Make sure [Print] is selected and press
OK
.
If you select [Delete], you can delete the print
job, and all of the encrypted jobs with the same
password are deleted as well.
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
 You cannot use this function with the poster printing mode
and the booklet mode with the Windows PCL printer driver
if you share the machine with a print server.
 When you use this function, clear the [Give Priority to
the host release] check box. For details, refer to "Using a
Print Buffer (MC561dn Only)" P. 67.
 [Start] > [Devices and Printers] > the OKI MC561 icon
> [Printer properties] > [OKI MC561(PS)] > [Device
Settings] > [Print only Encrypted print data] can not
be enabled with Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2.
 [Start] > [Operator panel] > [Printers] > the OKI
MC561 icon > [Properties] > [OKI MC561(PS)] >
[Device Settings] > [Print only Encrypted print data]
can not be enabled with Windows Server 2008 and
Windows Vista.
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
Watermark Printing
You can print pages with a watermark or text.
Note
 This function is not available with the Mac OS X printer driver.
 Watermarks are not printed properly for booklet printing.
For Windows Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select [Job Options] tab.
1
Open the file you want to print.
5
Click [Watermark].
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
6
Click [New].
3
Click [Preferences].
7
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
Specify text, a size and an angle for the
watermark and then click [OK].
5
Select [Encrypted Secure Print].
8
Click [OK].
6
Enter a password in the [Password] box
and configure other options if necessary.
9
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Note
Reference
 For details on the options, refer to the on-screen
explanations of the driver.
 Watermarks are printed over the text or images of
documents in the default settings with the Windows PS.
- 63 -
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
printer driver. To print in the background of documents,
check the [In Background] box in the [Watermark]
window.
When the [Background] is checked on the [Watermark]
window, depending on an application you use, the
watermark may not be printed. In such a case, uncheck
[Background].
Overlay Printing (for MC561dn
Only)
You can print overlays such as logos or forms on
documents.
9
Enter the ID of the form you registered
in the Storage Device Manager in the
[ID].
10 Select the pages of the document on
which to print the overlay from the
[Print on Pages] drop-down list.
11 Click [Add].
12 Click [Close].
13 Select the overlay to use from the
[Defined Overlays] and click [Add].
The machine must be equipped with an SD
memory card for this function.
14 Click [OK].
Note
15 Configure other settings if necessary and
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
Reference
 For details of the Storage Device Manager and on how to
install an SD memory card, refer to "Storage Device
Manager" P. 112.
Memo
 An overlay is a form group. You can register three forms
with one overlay.
Create an overlay with the storage
device manger and register it on the
machine.
Reference
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561(PS)].
3
Select the [Job Options] tab.
4
Click [Overlay].
5
Select [Use Overlay] from the
dropdown list and click [New].
6
Enter the exact name of the overlay you
registered in the Storage Device
Manager in the [Form Name] box and
click [Add].
7
Enter a name for the overlay in the
[Overlay Name] box
8
Select the page of the document on
which to print the overlay from the
[Print on Pages] drop-down list.
9
Click [OK].
 "Register Forms (Form Overlay)" P. 113.
2
Define the overlay on the printer driver
and start printing.
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
Memo
 Overlay is a group of forms. Three forms can be registered
in an overlay.
The forms are printed over in a registered order. The form
registered last is printed at the top.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Click [Overlay].
6
Select the [Print Using Active
Overlays] check box.
7
Click [Define Overlays].
8
Enter a name for the overlay in the
[Overlay Name] box.
10 Select the overlay to use from the
[Defined Overlay] list and then click
[Add].
11 Click [OK].
- 64 -
Printing
 To use this function on a Windows PS printer driver, you
need to log into your computer as an administrator.
1
4
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
12 Click [OK] to close the print setup dialog
- Press the <CLEAR> key if you enter a wrong
number.
13 Open the file you want to print.
- Press the <STOP> key if you want to stop the job
search.
box.
14 Start printing on the print dialog.
13 Make sure [Print] is selected and then
press
Storing Print Data (for
MC561dn Only)
OK
.
If you select [Delete], you can delete the print
job.
You can store print data on the SD memory card
installed on the machine and print it as needed
from the operator panel by entering a password.
14 Enter the number of copies and then
press
OK
.
Reference
 You can delete stored print data with the Storage Device
Manager. For details, refer to "Delete Unwanted Jobs from
an SD Memory Card" P. 114.
Note
 If there is not enough space on the SD memory card for
the spooled data, a message indicating the file system is
full appears and the print job does not start.
Saving the Driver Settings
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver
You can save the printer driver settings.
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
Note
 This function is not available with the Windows PS printer
driver, the Mac OS X printer driver and the Fax driver.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Check [Store to SD].
6
Enter a job name in the [Job Name] box
and a password in the [Job Password]
box.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
 Saving the Settings
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and then
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561(*)].
If you check the [Request Job Name for each
print job] box, a prompt for the job name
appears when you send the job to the machine.
*Select the type of driver you want to use.
7
Click [OK].
3
Configure the print settings to save.
8
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
4
On the [Setup] tab, click [Add] at
[Driver Settings].
5
Specify a name for the setting to save
and then click [OK].
The print job is sent to the machine, but is not
printed.
9
Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel.
10 Press the
then press
11 Press the
then press
to select [Print Job] and
OK
.
If you select the [Keep form information.]
check box, the paper configuration on the [Setup]
tab is also saved.
6
to select [Stored Job] and
OK
Memo
 Up to 14 forms can be stored.
.
12 Enter the password you set in step 6 in
the [Password] box and then press
to start a job searching.
Click [OK] to close the print setup dialog
box.
OK
 Using the Saved Settings
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
- 65 -
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Setup] tab, select a setting you
want to use from [Driver Settings].
5
Start printing.
Using Printer Fonts
You can print your documents using pre-installed
printer fonts by substituting them for TrueType
fonts in the computer.
Note
Changing the Driver's Default
Settings
 The printer fonts do not exactly duplicate the appearance
of the TrueType fonts seen on screen.
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
You can use print settings often used as the
printer driver's default settings.
 To use this function with the Windows PS printer driver you
must be logged on your computer as an administrator.
 This function is not available in some applications.
For Windows Printer Driver
1
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and then
select [Printing preferences]>[OKI
MC561(*)].
*Select the type of driver you want to use.
3
4
Configure the print settings to use as the
driver's default setting.
Click [OK].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
5
Click [Font].
6
Select the [Font Substitution] check
box.
7
Specify which printer font you substitute
for each TrueType font in the [Font
Substitution Table].
1
Open a file.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
8
Click [OK].
3
Configure the print settings to use as the
driver's default settings.
9
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
4
Select [Save As] from [Presets].
5
Enter a name for the settings and click
[OK].
6
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and then
select [Printer properties]>[OKI
MC561(PS)].
3
Select the [Device Settings] tab.
4
Substitute a printer font for each TrueType
font in the [Font Substitution Table].
Click [Cancel].
Note
 To use the saved settings, select the name from [Presets]
in the print dialog.
To specify the font substitution, click each
TrueType font and select a printer font to
substitute from the pull-down menu.
5
Click [OK].
6
Open the file you want to print.
7
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
- 66 -
4
Printing
2
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
8
Click [Preferences].
9
On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
10 Select [Substitute Device Font] at
[TrueType Font] and then click [OK].
11 Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
Using a Print Buffer (MC561dn
Only)
You can spool a print job in the SD memory card
installed in the machine. This function frees
memory on your computer so it can handle other
tasks faster while the machine is running in the
background.
Note
Using Computer Fonts
 If there is not enough space on the SD memory card for
the spooled data, a message indicating the file system is
full appears and the print job does not start.
You can print your documents using TrueType
fonts in the computer to retain the font
appearance on screen.
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X printer driver.
Note
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL XPS
printer driver and the Mac OS X PS printer driver.
For Windows PCL Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
1
Open the file you want to print.
3
Click [Preferences].
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
3
Click [Preferences].
5
Click [Advanced].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab.
6
5
Click [Font].
Select the [Priority is given to AP
collation] check box and click [OK].
6
Clear the [Font Substitution] check box
and then click [OK].
7
Start printing on the print dialog.
Changing the Mono-Print
Speed Settings
- [Download as Outline Font]
Font images are created by the printer.
- [Download as Bitmap Font]
You can adjust the speed that documents are
printed.
Font images are created by the printer driver
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
5
Memo
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, an administrator
password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
1
Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
Click [TrueType Font] and select
[Download as Softfont] from the
dropdown list.
5
Press the
6
Click [OK].
6
7
Configure other settings if necessary and
then start printing.
then press
- 67 -
OK
.
to select [Print Setup] and
OK
.
Make sure [Print menu] is selected and
then press
OK
.
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
7
Press the
then press
8
Press the
to select [Print Setup] and
OK
The machine can print the attached files
automatically when it receives an e-mail. To use
this function you have to configure the email
reception setting.
to select [Mono-Print
Speed] and then press
9
OK
.
Select a speed mode and then press
OK
.
- [Auto]:
The default setting. This mode suffices for general
usage.
- [Color Print Speed]:
Effective for a large color print job.
- [Normal Print Speed]:
Effective for a large print job with color and blackand- white pages mixed.
10 Press the
Printing E-mail Attached Files
.
until the top screen
Note
 The following file formats are supported:
- PDF (v1.7), JPEG, TIFF (V6 Baseline).
 They differ depending on the file page size and the file
format what size of paper an attached file is printed on and
whether to enable the fitting function. For the other
printing settings for the number of copies or whether to do
duplex printing, the current settings configured on the
[Admin Setup] menu are applied.
Memo
Reference
Printing to File
 For details on how to configure the settings to print e-mail
attached files, refer to "Configuring Server to Print Files
Attached to E-mails" P. 171 or the User's Manual Basic.
You can print a document to a file, without
printing it out on paper.
Downloading PS Files
Note
 You must be logged on your computer as an administrator.
For Windows Printer Driver
You can download PostScript files to the machine
and print them.
Note
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
 This function is available only when you are using a TCP/IP
network.
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and then
select [Printer properties]>[OKI
MC561(*)].
For OKI LPR Utility
*Select the type of driver you want to use.
3
Select the [Ports] tab.
4
Select [FILE:] from the port list and click
[OK].
5
Start printing on the print dialog.
6
Enter the name of a file and then click
[OK].
1
Launch the OKI LPR Utility.
2
Select [Download] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
3
Select the file to download and click
[Open].
After finishing the download, the PostScript file is
printed.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [PDF] on the print dialog and select
a file format.
4
Enter the name of a file and select where
to save it in and click [Save].
- 68 -
Printing
 Up to 10 files and a maximum of 8 MB for each file can be
printed.
appears.
4
Useful Operations for Printing From a Computer
Printing Out PS Errors
You can print out a PostScript error when it
occurs.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
6
Note
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Preferences].
4
On the [Layout] tab, click [Advanced].
5
Click [Send PostScript Error Handler]
under [PostScript Options] and select
[Yes] from the drop-down list.
6
Click [OK] until the print setup dialog
box is closed.
8
9
Note
 This function is not available with the Mac OS X 10.5 or
10.6.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Error Handling] from the panel
menu.
4
Select [Print detailed report] at
[PostScript Errors].
5
Click [Print].
Changing Emulation Mode
You can select the emulation mode.
Memo
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, an administrator
password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
1
Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2
Press the
to select [Admin Setup]
and then press
3
OK
to select [System
Press the
OK
.
to select an emulation
mode and then press
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
Open the file you want to print.
.
.
Enter the administrator password.
- 69 -
OK
.
Make sure [Personality] is selected and
then press
1
1
Press the
OK
Configuration Menu] and then press
7
For Windows PS Printer Driver
.
to select [Printer
Functions] and then press
 This function is not available with the Windows PCL printer
driver and the Windows PCL XPS printer driver.
OK
Press the
appears.
OK
.
until the top screen
5. Job Macro (for MC561dn Only)
This chapter explains the job macro function.
 JOB MACRO
This section explains how to make macros for jobs that you do frequently.
You can register macros for frequently used function settings for copying, scanning, faxing, internet
faxing, and printing in the machine and create shortcuts. This "Job Macro" allows you to perform
operations more simply and quickly.
You can create a macro for settings on the following functions:
 Copying (Color/Mono)
 Printing from USB Memory
 Scanning to e-mail
 Scanning to network PC
 Scanning to USB Memory
 Fax Sending
5
 Internet Fax Sending
Note
Memo
 You can register up to 10 macros.
 Overwriting
Creating a Macro
You can create a macros for settings frequently
used.
 Registering a new macro
1
Specify the settings you want to register
at the operator panel.
2
Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
3
Press the
OK
Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
3
Press the
5
OK
6
6
Select [Enter] and then press
7
On the confirmation screen, press the
.
to select [Yes] and then press
OK
OK
.
OK
.
to scroll the setting list on the
On the confirmation screen,Press the
to select [Yes] and then press
Enter a title for the new macro.
8
Select [Enter] and then press
- 70 -
.
to select [Register] and
7
.
OK
Check the settings and then press
or
Enter a title for the new macro.
OK
Press the
Press the
screen.
.
to scroll the setting list on the
to select an entry number
for a new macro and then press
then press
5
or
2
4
.
Check the settings and then press
Press the
screen.
Specify the settings you want to register
at the operator panel.
to select a registered
number and then press
4
1
OK
.
OK
.
Job Macro (for MC561dn Only)
 If the user authentication is enabled, log into the machine before following the procedures below.
JOB MACRO
Using Macros
Deleting a Macro
You can use macros by reading out the macros.
You can delete macros.
1
Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
1
Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
2
Press the
2
Press the
to select the macro you
want to use and then press
3
4
OK
Check the settings and then press
3
.
OK
or
4
OK
.
5
If the access control is enabled on the functions
you want to use, a message appears indicating
that you are not permitted to use them and the
screen returns to the confirmation message.
6
Start a job.
Editing the Title
You can edit the title of your macro.
1
Press the <JOB MACRO> key to open
the job macro menu.
2
Press the
to select the macro whose
title you want to edit and then press
3
Press the
then press
4
.
to select [Title Edit] and
OK
.
Check the settings and then press
Press the
screen.
OK
OK
.
to scroll the setting list on the
5
Enter a new title.
6
Select [Enter] and then press
OK
OK
.
- 71 -
OK
.
to select [Delete] and then
.
Check the settings and then press
Press the
screen.
to select [Yes] on the
confirmation message
Press the
press
.
to scroll the setting list on the
Press the
to select the macro you
want to delete and then press
.
Select [Readout] and then press
Press the
screen.
5
OK
OK
.
to scroll the setting list on the
Press the
or
to select
confirmation screen.
OK
on the
6. Configuring at the Operator Panel
This chapter explains how to configure the equipment settings from the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
 Changing the Equipment Settings
This section explains the basic procedure to change the equipment settings.
Reference
 For details on the menu structure of the equipment settings, refer to "Device Setting Menu" P. 74.
Memo
 An item which cannot be re-set is indicated as [---].
Admin Setup or Easy Setup
Other Menus
To enter the [Admin Setup] menu or the [Easy
Setup] menu, an administrator password is
necessary.
Memo
1
Press the <SETTING> key to open the
equipment setting menu.
2
Press the
to select the setup menu on
which you want to change a setting and
then press OK .
 The default password is "aaaaaa".
1
3
Change the setting and then press
Press the
4
Press the
appears.
to select [Admin Setup] or
[Easy Setup] and then press
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press the
to select the setup menu on
which you want to change a setting and
then press .
6
Change the setting and then press
OK
.
OK
For [Easy Setup], repeat the step 6 until the
message indicating the setting completion is
displayed.
7
For
the
For
the
[Admin Setup], press the
until
top screen appears.
[Easy Setup], press OK to complete
setup.
Memo
 If you want to cancel the setup of [Easy Setup], press
<RESET/LOG OUT> key.
- 72 -
until the top screen
OK
6
.
Configuring at the Operator Panel
2
Press the <SETTING> key to open the
equipment setting menu.
Checking the Current Settings
 Checking the Current Settings
This section explains the basic operational procedure for report printing. With report printing, you can
check the current settings of the machine.
Printing Reports
You can print and check the configuration or
the job logs of the machine.
Reference
 For details on the reports you can print and the structure
of the [Reports] menu, refer to "Reports" P. 74.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Make sure [Reports] is selected and
then press
OK
.
If you want to print the [Menu Map], follow
procedure 4.
3
Press the
to select the category to
which the report you want to print
belongs and then press OK .
4
Press
to select the report you want to
print and then press OK .
If the entry screen for the admin
password, enter the admin password and
select [Enter], and then, press OK .
5
Press the
or
to select [Yes] on the
confirmation message and then press
OK
.
Note
 When [Admin Setup]>[Management]>[System
Setup]>[Allow All Reports To Print] is [Disable], the
admin password is required for printing the following
reports.
- Scan To Log
- Speed Dial List
- Address Group List
- Communication Management Report (Fax)
- Communication Management Report (Email / Internet
Fax)
- Email Address List
- 73 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
 List of the Device Setting Menu Items
This section explains the configuration of the equipment setting menu.
Device Setting Menu
Items
Description
Reference
Reports
Prints reports.
page 74
Paper Setup
Performs the paper settings of trays.
page 75
Address book
Creates or edits an address book.
page 76
Phone book
Creates or edits a phone book.
page 76
Profile
Creates or edits a profile.
page 77
Network Scan Destination
Sets a destination of the network scan.
page 79
Store Document Settings
Performs the storing setting of scanned document data.
page 80
View Information
Checks the machine information.
page 80
Shutdown
Performs shutdown.
page 80
Easy Setup
Performs Easy Setup. To enter this menu, the admin password is
required.
page 81
Admin Setup
Performs Admin Setup. To enter this menu, the admin password is
required.
page 82
6
List of Each Setup Menu
Item
Description
Configuration
Prints the configuration details of the machine.
System
File List
Prints a job file list.
Demo Page
Prints a demo page.
Error Log
Prints an error log.
Scan To Log
Prints the results of the jobs of Scan to E-mail, Scan to
Network PC, or Scan to USB Memory. Display condition:
[Admin Setup]>[Device Management]>[Job Log
Setup]>[Save Job Log] is set to [Enable].
MFP Usage
Fax
Email/
Internet
FAX
Copies
Prints the total of the job logs. Specifies the number of
pages to print in the [Copies] screen.
Network Information
Prints general information on the network.
Speed Dial List
Prints the list of the fax numbers registered for speed
dials.
Group List
Prints the list of the fax numbers registered under groups.
Fax Tx/Rx Log
Prints the list of the communication results of the latest
50 fax jobs received or sent.
Fcode Box List
Prints the list of Fcode boxes.
Journal Report
Prints the results of the latest 50 Internet Fax jobs.
Address Book
Prints the registered address list.
- 74 -
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Reports
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
Printer
Description
PCL Font List
Prints the list of PCL font samples.
PSE Font
List Prints the list of PostScript font samples.
PPR Font List
Prints a font list of IBMPPR.
FX Font List
Prints a font list of EPSON FX.
Color Tuning Pattern
Prints a color tuning pattern for adjusting gradation characteristics.
ColorProfile List
Prints the list of color profiles.
Paper Setup
Item
Tray1
Paper size
Selects a paper size.
Width
210 mm
(8.3 inch)
Length
297mm
(11.7 inch)
Sets width and length for a custom paper
size.
Display condition: [Custom] is selected
as a paper size.
Available range:
Width:100 to 216 mm (3.9 to 8.5 inches)
Length: 148 to 356 mm (5.8 to 14.0 inches)
Media Type
Plain
Selects a paper type.
Media Weight
Medium
Selects a paper weight.
Paper size
A4
Selects a paper size.
Display condition: the second tray unit is
installed.
Width
210 mm
(8.3 inch)
Length
297mm
(11.7 inch)
Sets width and length for a custom paper
size.
Display condition: [Custom] is selected
as a paper size and the second tray unit is
installed.
Available range:
Width:148 to 216 mm (5.8 to 8.5 inches)
Length: 210 to 356 mm (8.3 to 14.0 inches)
Custom
MP Tray
Media Type
Plain
Selects a paper type.
Display condition: The second tray unit is
installed.
Media Weight
Medium
Selects a paper weight.
Display condition: The second tray unit is
installed.
Paper size
A4
Selects a paper size.
Width
210 mm
(8.3 inch)
Length
297mm
(11.7 inch)
Sets width and length for a custom paper
size.
Display condition: [Custom] is selected
as a paper size.
Available range:
Width:64 to 216 mm (2.5 to 8.5 inches)
Length: 127 to 1321 mm (5.0 to 52.0 inches)
Media Type
Plain
Selects a paper type.
Media Weight
Medium
Selects a paper weight.
Tray1
ON
Tray2
ON
MP Tray
OFF
Selects a tray to use for received documents.
Display condition for [Tray 2]: the second
tray unit is installed.
Custom
Select
Tray
Description
A4
Custom
Tray2
Factory
Default
Fax
- 75 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
Copy
Tray1
ON (Prior)
Tray2
ON
MP Tray
OFF
Duplex Last Page
Skip Blank
Page
Description
Specifies a tray to use when a tray is automatically selected.
Display condition for [Tray 2]: the second
tray unit is installed.
If [Skip Blank Page] is selected, when odd
pages are printed in the double-sided print
mode, the final page is printed on only
one side. (*)
If [Always Print] is selected, both sides are
printed even for odd page job in the double-sided print mode.
* This function may not be usable by some applications.
Address Book
Item
E-mail Address
Edit/Register
Description
Name
Sets a name of a destination. Maximum16
characters.
E-mail Address
Sets an e-mail address. Maximum 80
characters.
Group No.
Selects a group.
Delete
Sort By Name
Sorts email addresses by name.
Sort By Number
Sorts email addresses into registered
numerical order.
Edit/Register
Name
Sets a group name. Maximum 16 characters.
Address No.
Selects address numbers. Maximum 100
addresses to be registered for a group.
Delete
Deletes the registered group.
Sort By Name
Sorts groups by name.
Sort By Number
Sorts groups into registered numerical
order.
Phone Book
Item
Speed Dial
Group No.
Edit/Register
Description
Name
Sets the name of a destination. Maximum
24 characters.
Fax Number
Sets a fax number. Maximum 40 digits.
Group No.
Selects a group.
Delete
Deletes the registered speed dial.
Sort By Name
Sorts speed dials by name.
Sort By Number
Sorts speed dials into registered numerical
order.
Edit/Register
Name
Sets a group name. Maximum 16 characters.
Speed Dial
Sets a speed dial. Maximum 100
addresses to be registered for a group.
Delete
Deletes the registered group.
Sort By Name
Sorts groups by name.
Sort By Number
Sorts groups into registered numerical order.
- 76 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
E-mail Group
Deletes the registered address.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Profile
Factory
Default
Item
Register/ Edit
Factory Default
Profile Name
(NULL)
Sets a profile name. Maximum 16 characters.
Protocol
CIFS
Selects a protocol to use for storing files.
Target URL
(NULL)
Sets a server address and a directory to
store the scanned data. Maximum
Port No.
445
Sets a port number.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
PASV Mode
OFF
Sets whether to use the FTP Passive
mode.
Display condition: FTP is set as a protocol.
User Name
(NULL)
Sets a user name to use for logging onto
the server. Maximum 32 characters.
Password
(NULL)
Sets a password to use when logging.
Maximum 32 characters.
CIFS Character Set
UTF-16
Sets a character set to use in CIFS.
Display condition: CIFS is set as a protocol.
Encode Communication
None
Selects an encryption method for communication. Not available when using CIFS
protocol. Choices are different depending
on the protocol being selected.
Scan Size
A4
Selects a scan size.
Image Settings Density
0
Sets the density of images.
Document Type
Text/Photo
Sets the image quality of documents.
Background Removal
3
Sets the default setup of the background
removal of documents.
Resolution
200 dpi
Selects a resolution for scanning.
Contrast
0
Sets the contrast of documents.
Hue
0
Sets the red-green color balance.
Saturation
0
Sets the color saturation of documents.
RGB
0
Sets the RGB contrast.
File name
(NULL)
Sets a file name. Maximum 64 characters.
The following options can be set as the
default file name:*1
#n: adding a serial number from 00000 to
99999
#d: adding the date of a file creation
(yymmddhhmmss)
Grayscale
OFF
Sets whether to scan a monochrome job
in grayscale (ON) or in black and white
(OFF).
- 77 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
Edit/
Register
File Format
Color
PDF
Mono(Grayscale)
PDF
Mono (Binary)
PDF
Encrypted PDF
Factory Default
Sets a file format for scanning.
Not Encrypt
Sets whether to enable PDF encryption.
Encryption level
Medium
Sets the encryption level.
Document open password
Disable
Sets a password to open an encrypted PDF. A
document open password cannot be the
same as an authority password.Maximum 32
characters.
Permissions Password
Disable
Sets a password to control printing or
editing on an encrypted PDF. An authority
password cannot be the same as a document open password. Maximum 32 characters.
Permission
Not Allowed
Sets the permission settings on encrypted
PDF.
Permission
toPrint
Permission to Not Allowed
Extract Text/
Graphics
Display Condition: An authority password is
set.
Permission to Not Allowed
Edit
CompressionRate
Low
Sets a compression rate for scanning.
Mono (Grayscale)
Low
Mono (Binary)
High
Setting
OFF
Sets whether to erase the edge shadow
created in the surrounding of 2-page
spread documents.
Width
5 mm
(0.2 inch)
Sets an erasing width.
Available range: 5 to 50 mm (0.2 to 2.0
inches).
Delete
Deletes profiles.
Sort By Name
Sorts profiles by name.
Sort By Number
Sorts profiles into registered numerical
order.
- 78 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Edge Erase
Color
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
*1 In profiles, "#n" or #d" can be specified for [File Name].
When specifying "#n": 5-digit serial number between 00000 to 99999
When specifying "#d": Date and time when a file is created. 12 digits of yymmddhhmmss.
yy:
Year created (the last 2 digits of
the Christian Era)
mm: Month created (01 to 12)
dd: Date created (01 to 31)
hh:
Hours created (00 to 23)
mm: Minute created (00 to 59)
ss: Second created (00 to 59)
*A date and time when a file is created are values of the timer of MC561dn.
Example of file name specification (when the file format is PDF)
When specifying "Data#n":
When specifying "File#d":
When specifying "Scan":
When nothing is specified:
Saved as file names such as "Data0000.pdf" and
"Data00001.pdf",etc.
saved as file names "File090715185045.pdf", etc.
"Scan.pdf" is created first, and then, data is saved with the name
of"Scan#d.pdf".
For "#d", refer to the above.
"Image.pdf" is created first and then, data is saved with the name of
"Image#d.pdf".
For "#d", refer to the above.
Note
 File names registered in profiles, are applied when executing Scan To Network PC.
When performing Auto Deliver using profiles with these file names, the above names are not applied.
The file name at Auto Delive is fixed to "yymmddhhmmss_xxxxxxxx.pdf". The part of "yymmddhhmmss" is date and time when
a file is created for the above "#d", and the part of "_xxxxxxxx" is additional 8 numeric values (meaningless value) so as not to
duplicate other files.
Network Scan Destination
Item
Edit/
Register
Factory
Default
Description
Destination
(NULL)
Sets a destination name. Maximum 16
characters.
Destination Address
(NULL)
Sets a destination address. Maximum 64
characters.
Port No.
9968
Sets a port number.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
Delete
Deletes a destination.
Sort By Name
Sorts destinations by name.
Sort By Number
Sorts destinations into registered numerical order.
- 79 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Store Document Settings
Item
Description
Store
Fcode Bulletin
board
Over Write
Stores documents in a bulletin box.
Delete
Fcode Bulletin board
Deletes accumulated documents.
Print
Fcode Box
Prints accumulated documents.
View Information
Item
System information
Serial No.
Indicates the serial number of the machine.
Asset No.
Indicates the asset number of the machine.
Lot No.
Indicates the production lot number of the machine.
CU Version
Indicates the version number of the control unit firmware.
PU Version
Indicates the version number of the print unit firmware.
Scanner Version
Indicates the version number of the scanner firmware.
Total Memory
Indicates the total capacity of all RAMs installed.
Flash Memory
Indicates the total capacities of all flash memories.
SD Memory Card
Indicates the size of the SD memory card and the version of the file system.In MC361dn, [Not Installed] is displayed.
IPv4 address
Indicates the IPv4 address of the machine.
Display condition: [Admin Setup]>[Network Menu]>[Network
Setup]>[TCP/IP] is set to [Enable] and [IP Version] is not set to
[IPv6].
Subnet Mask
Indicates the subnet mask of the machine.
Display condition: [Admin Setup]>[Network Menu]>[Network
Setup]>[TCP/IP] is set to [Enable] and [IP Version] is not set to
[IPv6].
Gateway Address
Indicates the gateway address of the machine.
Display condition: [Admin Setup]>[Network Menu]>[Network
Setup]>[TCP/IP] is set to [Enable] and [IP Version] is not set to
[IPv6].
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the machine.
NIC Program Version
Indicates the version number of the network firmware.
IPv6 Address
(Local)
Indicates the IPv6 address of the machine.
Display condition: [Admin Setup]>[Network Menu]>[Network
Setup]>[TCP/IP] is set to [Enable] and [IP Version] is not set to
[IPv4].
IPv6 Address
(Global)
Indicates the IPv6 address of the machine.
Display condition: [Admin Setup]>[Network Menu]>[Network
Setup]>[TCP/IP] is set to [Enable] and [IP Version] is not set to
[IPv4].
Shutdown
Item
Shutdown
Description
Does a controlled shutdown of the machine.
- 80 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Network
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Easy Setup
Memo
 To enter the [Easy Setup] menu, an administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Item
Date/
Time
Setting
Description
Time Zone
Sets the time zone in relation to GMT.
Daylight Saving Time
Maximum 20 characters can be entered. "+","-" symbol
also allowed to input.
Manual
Sets the current date and time manually.
Date
Time
Server
SNTP Server (Primary)
Sets the SNTP server to use for setting the current date
and time. Maximum 64 characters.
SNTP Server (Secondary)
Fax Setting
Network
Setting
E-mail
Setting
FAX Number
Sets the fax number for the machine.Maximum 20 characters.
Sender ID
Sets a sender ID. Maximum 22 characters.
Manual setting IP Address
Sets the IP address. Maximum 15 characters. (You can
enter a value between 000.000.000.000 and
255.255.255.255)
Subnet Mask
Sets the subnet mask. Maximum 15 characters. (You can
enter a value between 000.000.000.000 and
255.255.255.255)
Default Gateway
Sets the default gateway address. Maximum15 characters. (You can enter a value between 000.000.000.000
and 255.255.255.255)
DNS Server (Primary)
Sets the IP address for a Primary DNS server. Maximum
15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
DNS Server (Secondary)
Sets the IP address for a Secondary DNS server. Maximum 15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
WIN Server (Primary)
Sets the name or the IP address for theWINS server.
Maximum 15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
WIN Server (Secondary)
Sets the name or the IP address for theWINS server.
Maximum 15 characters. (You can enter a value between
000.000.000.000 and 255.255.255.255)
Auto setting
Obtains an IP address automatically.
Mail Server Address
Sets the IP address or host name for the SMTP server.
Maximum 64 characters.
Set Sender's Address (from)
Sets an e-mail address for the machine.
Authentication method
Sets the authentication method.
SMTP Auth
POP before
SMTP
User Name
Sets the user ID for the SMTP authentication. Maximum
64 characters.
Password
Sets the password for the SMTP authentication. Maximum 64 characters.
POP3 Server
Sets the IP address or the host name for the POP3 server.
Maximum 64 characters.
User Name
Sets a user ID for the POP authentication. Maximum 64
characters.
Password
Sets a password for the POP3 authentication. Maximum
16 characters.
- 81 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Admin Setup
In the following menu, you can change the settings that need the administrator authority.
 "Copy Setup"
 "Fax Setup"
 "Internet Fax Setup"
 "Scanner Setup"
 "Print From USB Memory Setup"  "Print Setup"
 "Network Menu"
 "Management"
 "User Install"
Memo

To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, an administrator password is necessary. The default password is "aaaaaa".
 If you change the default setting from the [Admin Setup] menu, and want to reflect the changed default on the start screen
immediately, press <RESET/LOG OUT> key or press the function switch key which is any of <Copy>, <Scan>, <Print> and
<Fax>.
 Copy Setup
Factory
Default
Item
Default
Settings
Description
A4
Sets the default scan size.
Duplex Copy
OFF (Do not
do both
sides)
Sets the duplex (2-sided) function off or
on.
Zoom
100%
Sets the default zoom ratio.
Sort
ON
Sets whether to collate copied documents
by default.
Image Settings Density
0
Sets the default density of images.
Document Type
Text/Photo
Sets the default print quality when scanning documents.
Resolution For Color
Normal
Sets the default setting of resolution.
Background Removal
3
Sets the default setup of the background
removal.
Contrast
0
Sets the default setting of contrast.
Hue
0
Sets the default red-green color balance.
Saturation
0
Sets the default saturation setting.
RGB
0
Sets the default RGB contrast.
Direction
Portrait
Selects the default page orientation of
documents.
ID Card Copy
OFF
Sets whether to use the ID card copy
mode by default.
Continue Scan
OFF
Sets whether to use the continuous scan
mode.
Mixed Size
OFF
Sets whether different sized documents
are copied on each size paper as the
default.
OFF
Sets the default settings of margins.
Margin
Margin
- 82 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Scan Size
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
Default
Settings
Margin
Front
Left
Description
0
Available rage: 0 to ±25 mm
(0.0 to 1.0inches) (1 mm/ increment)
Setting
ON
Sets whether to erase the shade created
in the surrounding of 2-page spread documents as the default.
Width
2 mm
(0.1 inch)
Sets an erasing width.
Available range:2 to 50 mm
(0.1 to 2.0 inches).
Top
Back
Left
Top
Edge Erase
 Fax Setup
Factory
Default
Item
Default
Settings
Fcode
Box
Resolution
Normal
Sets the default setting of image quality.
Density
0
Sets the default density of images.
Scan Size
A4
Sets the default scan size.
Continue Scan
OFF
Sets whether to use the continue scan
mode.
TTI
ON
Sets whether to add the sender's name to
the header of the transmitted fax.
Transmit Confirmation Report
OFF
Sets whether to print the result of the
transmission automatically.
Memory Tx
ON
Sets whether to use memory transmission
(ON) or real-time transmission (OFF).
Box Name
(NULL)
Sets the name of confidential boxes. Maximum 16 characters.
Sub-Address
(NULL)
Sets the sub-address for your confidential
box. Maximum 20 characters.
Hold Time
0
Sets the hold time for your confidential
box. Available range: 00 to 31 days.
I.D.Code
(NULL)
Sets the password for your confidential
document box. Four characters from 0 to
9 (numbers only).
Box Name
(NULL)
Sets a bulletin box name. Maximum 16
characters.
Sub-Address
(NULL)
Sets a sub-address for your bulletin box.
Maximum 20 characters.
Edit/Register
Confidential
Box
Bulletin Box
Delete
Security
Function
Description
Deletes an Fcode box.
ID Check Tx
OFF
Sets whether to use the ID check transmission.
Broadcast Destination
ON
Sets whether to indicate the destination
number before starting broadcast transmission.
Confirm Dial
OFF
Sets whether to reenter the destination
fax number before sending a fax.
- 83 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
Other
settings
Fax Setting
Factory
Default
Description
2 times
Sets the number of redial attempts.
Available range: 0 to 9 times.
Redial Interval
1 minute
Sets the time between redial attempts.
Available range: 1 to 5 minutes.
Ring Response
1 ring
Sets the number of rings required before
receiving an incoming fax.
Dialing Pause Duration
2 seconds
Sets the dial pause time.
Available range: 0 to 10 seconds.
Rx Reduc. Rate
Auto
Sets the reception reduction rate.
Reduc. Margin
1.7 inch
Sets the threshold level of reception
reduction.
Available range: 0 to 100 mm
(0 to 3.9 inches).
ECM Mode
ON
Sets whether to use the error correction
mode.
PreFix
NULL
Sets the dialing prefix. Maximum 40 digits.
Received Time Stamp
OFF
Sets whether the time stamp is printed on
incoming faxes.
Print Check Message
ON
Sets whether the error content is reported
when a transmission error occurs.
Service Bit
OFF
If set OFF, some menu items are not displayed on the panel.
Country Code
Australia
(Singapore)
Sets the country code.
A/R Full Print
ON
It only shows, when ServiceBit = ON.
Tone For Echo (For Transmission)
Disable
It only shows, when ServiceBit = ON.
Tone For Echo (For Reception)
Disable
It only shows, when ServiceBit = ON.
H/Modem Rate(For Tx)
33.6 Kbps
Sets the default value of the modem
transmission speed while the machine is
sending a fax.
H/Modem Rate(For Rx)
33.6 Kbps
Sets the default value of the modem
transmission speed while the machine is
receiving a fax.
Attenuator
10 dB, Range : Enter Attenuator.It only shows, when Ser0-15 dB
vice Bit = ON.
MF Attenuator
8 dB, Range : Enter MF(Tone) Attenuator.It only shows,
0-15 dB
when Service Bit = ON.
Pulse Make Ratio
40 %, Range : Sets the make rate of DP (10 pps) during
33, 39, 40% call.It only shows, when Servic Bit = ON
and Tone/Pulse setting = PULSE.
Pulse Dial Type
N, Range : N, Sets the make rate of DP (10 pps) during
10-N, N+1
call.It only shows, when Servic Bit = ON
and Tone/Pulse setting = PULSE.
MF(Tone) Duration
100 mseconds, Enter MF(Tone) Duration.It only shows,
Range : 75,
when Service Bit = ON and Tone/Pulse
85, 100
setting = TONE.
mseconds
Calling Timer
60 seconds,
Range : 1255 seconds
It only shows, when Service Bit = ON.
PBX Line
OFF
When connecting to PBX (internal
exchange), put it to [ON].
- 84 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Redial Tries
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
Forwarding
Setting
Fax Setting
Description
Forwarding Setting
OFF
Sets whether to enable or not the fax forwarding mode.
Forwarding Number
(NULL)
Sets a fax number used for the fax forwarding mode.
TAD Mode
Type 3
Sets an action type at the answering
machine/ fax standby mode.
[Type 3]: a fax signal is detected in 15
seconds from incoming calls.
[Type 1]: A fax signal is detected right
after incoming calls and reception is performed. By setting to this type, if there is
anything wrong with fax reception, it may
be improved.
[Type 2]: A fax signal is detected right
after incoming calls. Set to this type if you
use as a phone mostly.
Tel Priority Mode
OFF
Sets a timing of phone rings for extension
phone and this machine at the phone/ fax
standby mode.
[ON]: assumes that the party is making a
phone call.
Phone rings are made early.
[OFF] assumes that the part is sending a
fax. If it is judged that the party is not
sending a fax, phone rings are made.
CNG Detection
OFF
Sets whether to judge that the party is
sending a fax during the off the hook condition at the phone / Fax standby mode.
T/F Timer Programming
35 seconds
Sets a time to start the auto reception of
fax when not answering the phone after
incoming calls at the phone / fax standby
mode or answering machine / fax standby
mode.
Soft Ringer Volume
High
Sets a phone ring volume at the phone /
fax standby mode.
Remote Receive Number
OFF
Sets a remote switch number.
 Internet Fax Setup
Factory
Default
Item
Default
Settings
Description
Scan Size
A4
Sets the default scan size.
Density
0
Sets the default density of images.
Resolution
Normal
Sets the default setting of resolution.
Background Removal
3
Sets the default setup of the background
removal.
Continue Scan
OFF
Sets whether to use the continue scan
mode by default.
Compression Rate
Low
Selects the default compression level.
- 85 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
 Scanner Setup
Factory
Default
Item
Default
Settings
Description
Scan Size
A4
Sets the default scan size.
Image Settings Density
0
Sets the default density of images.
Document Type
Text/Photo
Sets the image quality of the documents.
Background Removal
3
Sets the default setup of the background
removal.
Resolution
200 dpi
Sets the default resolution setting.
Contrast
0
Sets the default contrast setting.
Hue
0
Sets the default red-green color balance.
Saturation
0
Sets the default saturation setting.
RGB
0
Sets the default RGB contrast.
Continue Scan
OFF
Sets whether to perform continuous scan
as the default.
Grayscale
OFF
Sets whether to scan a monochrome job
in grayscale or in black and white.
Color
PDF
Mono (Grayscale)
PDF
Mono (Binary)
PDF
Selects the default file format. [Color] /
[Mono (Grayscale)] can be selected
from PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. [Mono
(Binary)] can be selected from PDF, TIFF,
and XPS.
File Format
Encrypted PDF Document open password
Setting
Edge Erase
Sets the default password to open an
encrypted PDF.
The same password with the authentication password can not be used. Maximum
32 characters.
Permissions password
(NULL)
Sets a default password to control printing
or editing on an encrypted PDF. The same
password with the Document open password can not be used. Maximum 32
characters.
Display Default Password
Disable
Sets whether the registered password is
displayed or not displayed on the password selection screen for the document
open password or authentication password.
[Disable]: Displays the registered default
password using * instead of each character.
[Enable]: Displays the registered default
password as it is.
Color
Low
Selects a default compression level.
Mono (Grayscale)
Low
Mono (Binary)
High
Setting
OFF
Sets whether to erase the edge shadow
created in the surrounding of 2-page
spread document.
Width
5 mm
(0.2 inch)
Sets an erasing width. Available range: 5
to 50 mm (0.2 to 2.0 inches).
- 86 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Compression
Rate
(NULL)
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
E-mail
Setup
File Name
Factory
Default
Description
(NULL)
Sets a file name of scanned images. Maximum 64 characters.
The following options can be set as the
default file name*1:
#n: adding a serial number from 00000 to
99999
#d: adding the date of a file creation
(yymmddhhmmss)
Edit Subject
(NULL)
Registers or edits standard e-mail subject
text. Maximum 80 characters.
Edit Body
(NULL)
Registers or edits standard e-mail body
text. Maximum 256 characters.
From
(NULL)
Sets the e-mail address which is given to
the [From] column. Maximum 80 characters.
Reply to
(NULL)
Sets the e-mail address which is given to
the [Reply to] column. Maximum 80
characters.
Broadcast Destination
ON
Sets whether an e-mail address confirmation screen is displayed before sending the
e-mail.
MDN Response
OFF
Sets whether to request the MDN (message disposition notification) response.
A/R Full Print
ON
Sets whether to print the transmission and
reception history reports automatically.
MCF Report
ON
Sets whether to print a fax confirmation
after transmission.
Timeout of MCF Report
15 minutes
Sets the timeout for printing a fax confirmation after transmission. If the setting
period of time is exceeded, the report is
automatically printed without the MDN
response.
Print Check Message
ON
Sets whether the error content is reported
when a transmission error occurs.
USB
Memory
Setup
File Name
(NULL)
Sets the default setup for file names. Maximum 64 characters The following options
can be set as the default file name*1:
#n: adding a serial number from 00000 to
99999
#d: adding the date of a file creation
(yymmddhhmmss).
Twain
Setup
Network TWAIN
ON
Sets whether to use the Network TWAIN.
9967
Sets the port number. Available range: 1
to 65535.
PC Scan Mode
Simple Scan
Mode
Selects the default PC scan mode.
Timeout Setting
5 minutes
Sets the timeout duration.
Available range: 1 to 30 minutes.
Template
From / Reply
To
Scanner
Calibration
Port
No.*2
Execute
Starts a scanner calibration.
- 87 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
*1 "#n" or "#d" can be specified for [File Name].
When specifying "#n": 5-digit serial number between 00000 to 99999
When specifying "#d": Date and time when a file is created. 12 digits of yymmddhhmmss.
yy:
Year created (the last 2 digits of
the Christian Era)
mm: Month created (01 to 12)
dd: Date created (01 to 31)
hh:
Hours created (00 to 23)
mm: Minute created (00 to 59)
ss: Second created (00 to 59)
*A date and time when a file is created are values of the timer of MC561dn.
Example of file name specification (when the file format is PDF)
When specifying "Data#n":
When specifying "File#d":
When specifying "Scan":
When nothing is specified:
Saved as file names such as "Data0000.pdf" and "Data00001.pdf",
etc.
saved as file names "File090715185045.pdf", etc.
"Scan.pdf" is created first, and then, data is saved with the name of
"Scan#d.pdf".For "#d", refer to the above.
"Image.pdf" is created first and then, data is saved with the name of
"Image#d.pdf". For "#d", refer to the above.
*2 To enable the changed setting, the network card must be restarted. Follow the instructions on
the confirmation screen displayed when changing the settings, and restart the network card.
 Print From USB Memory Setup
Factory
Default
Item
Default
Settings
Description
Tray 1 (A4)
Sets the default feed tray.
Copies
1
Sets the number of copies.
Duplex
OFF
Sets whether to use the duplex function
by default.
Binding
Long edge
bind
Sets the default binding position for
duplex printing.
Fit
ON
Sets whether to scale the page size of
documents to fit the paper size.
 Print Setup
Item
Print
Menu
Tray Configura- Paper Feed
tion
Factory
Default
Description
Tray 1
Selects the default feed tray.
Auto Tray Switch
ON
Sets whether to enable the automatic tray
switch function.
Tray Sequence
Down
Sets the selection order priority for automatic tray selection and automatic tray
switching.
MP Tray Usage
Do Not Use
[When Mismatching]: If a paper size or
type in a tray is not matched to that of the
print data, uses paper from the MP tray
instead of the specified tray.
[Do Not Use]: makes the MP tray
unavailable in auto tray selection or
switching.
Media Check
Enable
Sets whether to check the un-matching
between the paper size and the page size
of documents.
- 88 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Paper Feed
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
Print
Menu
Print Setup
Printer Adjust
Description
Copies
1
Sets the number of copies of a document
to be printed. For local printing, this setting is invalid except for demo data. Available range: 1 to 999.
Duplex
OFF
Sets whether to use the duplex function
by default.
Binding
Long edge
bind
Sets the default binding position for
duplex printing.
Resolution
600dpi
Sets the resolution.
Toner Save Mode
OFF
Sets whether to use the toner save mode.
Mono-Print Speed
Auto
Selects a printing speed to suit your document type.
Orientation
Portrait
Selects the page orientation.
Lines Per Page
64 lines
Sets the number of lines of text per page (for
PCL only). The default number of lines for A4
portrait is 64. The number differs depending
on the size of paper on the feed tray.
Edit Size
Cassette size Sets the size of the printable page area to
match the size of the paper when there is
no specification by the command of paper
edit size specification from the computer.
It is unavailable in PS.
Width
210 mm
(8.3 inch)
Sets the default width of the custom size
paper. Available range: 64 to 216 mm (2.5
to 8.5 inches).
Length
297 mm
(11.7 inch)
Selects the default length of the custom
size paper. Available range: 127 to 1321
mm (5.0 to 52.0 inches).
Manual Timeout
60 seconds
Sets how many seconds the machine will wait
for paper to be fed before cancelling a job.
Wait Timeout
40 seconds
Sets how many seconds the machine will
wait when received data pauses before
forcing a page eject. A PS job is canceled
if timeout occurs.
Print Mode without Color
Toner
Alarm
• Alarm: When a color document is
received, the alarm is displayed and the
printer is set off line.
• Cancel: When a color document is
received, color printing is canceled and
the printer is kept on line.
Jam Recovery
Enable
Sets whether the machine will attempt to
re-print any pages lost due to a paper jam
once the jam has been cleared.
Paper Black Setting
0
Sets values to make a fine adjustment to
very visible faded print results or light
specks (or streaks) results in plain paper
black setting.
Paper Color Setting
0
Sets values to make a fine adjustment to
very visible faded print results or light
specks (or streaks) results in plain paper
color setting.
SMR Setting
0
Corrects variations in print results caused
by temperature and humidity conditions
and differences in print density and frequency. Change the setting if the print
quality is uneven.
- 89 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
0
Corrects variations in print results caused
by temperature and humidity conditions
and difference in print density and frequency. Change the setting if the background is dark.
Front X Adjust
0.00 mm
Adjusts the position of the whole printing
image perpendicular to the direction of
paper movement. Available range: ±2.00
mm (0.25 increments).
Front Y Adjust
0.00 mm
Adjusts the position of the whole printing
image parallel to the direction of paper
movement. Available range: ±2.00 mm
(0.25 increments).
Back X Adjust
0.00 mm
Adjusts the position of the image on the
reverse side of a duplex print perpendicular to the direction of paper movement.
Available range: ±2.00 mm (0.25 increments).
Back Y Adjust
0.00 mm
Adjusts the position of the image on the
reverse size of a duplex print parallel to
the direction of paper movement. Available range: ±2.00 mm (0.25 increments).
Drum Cleaning
OFF
Sets whether to do cleaning of a drum
before printing. It may have an effect for
improvement of image quality.
Hex Dump
OFF
Prints out the data received from the host
computer in hexidecimal code. To finish
printing, turn off the power.
Density Control
Auto
Selects whether image density is automatically or manually adjusted.
Adjust Density
Execute
Starts the auto density setup.
Color Tuning /
Print Pattern
Execute
Prints the color tuning pattern. Used for
adjusting the color balance.
Cyan Highlight
0
Cyan Mid-Tone
0
Cyan Dark
0
Magenta Highlight
0
Magenta Mid-Tone
0
Magenta Dark
0
Yellow Highlight
0
Yellow Mid-Tone
0
Yellow Dark
0
Black Highlight
0
Black Mid-Tone
0
Black Dark
0
Cyan Darkness
0
Magenta Darkness
0
Yellow Darkness
0
Black Darkness
0
Adjust Registration
Execute
Adjusts color tone density for each color.
The normal setting is 0.
Adjusts color tone density for each color.
The normal setting is 0.
Adjusts the density of each color (cyan,
magenta, yellow and black).
The normal setting is 0.
Does an automatic color registration
adjustment.
- 90 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
BG Setting
Print Position
Adjust
Color
Menu
Description
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
System
Configuration
Menu
PCL
Setup
Description
Cyan Reg Fine Adj
0
Magenta Reg Fine Adj
0
Yellow Reg Fine Adj
0
Ink Simulation
OFF
Sets the ink simulation. Valid only for the
PS print job.
UCR
Low
Selects the amount of black used during
color printing.
CMY100% Density
Disable
Selects whether black areas are produced
using 100% C, M and Y, or black. 100%C,
M, and Y results in a glossier finish.
CMYK Conversion
ON
When [OFF] is selected, the machine simplifies the conversion process of CMYK
data, which reduces processing time.
However, the color tone of print results is
changed. When using the ink simulation
function, this menu setting is disabled.
Personality
Auto Emulation
Selects the emulation mode. When set to
auto, the correct emulation is automatically
selected each time a print job is received.
Alarm Release
Manual
When [Manual] is selected, non-critical
warnings, such as requests for a different
paper size, can be cleared by pressing the
<RESET/LOG OUT> key. When [Auto] is
selected, they are cleared when the print
job resumes.
Auto Continue
OFF
Sets whether the machine automatically
recovers from a memory overflow.
Error Report
OFF
Sets whether to print error details when
PostScript errors occur.
Font Source
Resident
Selects the location of the font to use.
Font No.
I0
Selects the number of the font to use.
Available range: I0 to I90 when [Resident] is set.
Font Pitch
10.00 CPI
Sets the width of the PCL default font.
Available range: 0.44 to 99.99 CPI
(0.01CPI increments).
Font Height
12.00 point
Sets the height of the PCL default font.
Available range: 4.00 to 999.75 point.
(0.25 point increments)
Symbol Set
PC-8
Selects a PCL symbol set.
A4 Print Width
78 Column
Sets a number of digits for automatic line
feed on A4 paper.
White Page Skip
OFF
Selects whether to print blank pages.
CR Function
CR
Sets the machine operation when receiving CR code.
LF Function
LF
Sets the machine operation when receiving LF code.
Print Margin
Normal
Sets the area of the page that is nonprintable.
True Black
OFF
Selects whether black image data is
printed by using black toner only or mixing CMYK.
- 91 -
Does a fine adjustment to the image position error of each color.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Factory
Default
Item
Description
Pen Width Adjust
ON
Sets whether the thinnest line width is
emphasized to look wider.
Tray ID#
Tray2
5
MP Tray
4
Sets a number to tray 2 and the MP tray
for the paper feed destination command
inPCL emulation.
Available range: 1 to 59. Display condition
for [Tray 2]: the second tray unit is
installed.
PS Setup L1 Tray
TYPE 1
SIDM
Setup
SIDM Manual ID#
2
SIDM Manual2 ID#
3
SIDM MP Tray ID#
4
SIDM Tray1 ID#
1
SIDM Tray2 ID#
5
Character Pitch
10 CPI
Specifies character pitch in IBM PPR emulation.
Font Condense
12CPI to
20CPI
Specifies 12CPI pitch for Condense Mode.
Character Set
SET-2
Specifies a character set.
Symbol Set
IBM-437
Specifies a symbol set.
Letter O Style
Disable
Specifies the style that replaces 9BH with
letter o and 9DH with a zero.
Zero Character
Normal
Sets the zero to be slashed or unslashed.
Line Pitch
6LPI
Specifies the line spacing.
White Page Skip
OFF
Selects whether blank pages are printed
or not.
CR Function
CR
Selects whether a received carriage return
character (0Dh) also causes a line feed.
LF Function
LF
Selects whether a received line feed character (0Ah) also causes a carriage return.
Line Length
80 Column
Specifies the number of characters per
line.
Form Length
11.7 inch
Specifies the length of paper.
TOF Position
0.0inch
Specifies the distance of print from the top
edge of the paper.
Left Margin
0.0inch
Specifies the distance of print from the left
hand edge of the paper.
Fit to Letter
Disable
Sets the printing mode that can fit print
data, equivalent to 11 inches (66 lines), in
the LETTER-size printable area.
Text Height
Same
Sets the height of a character.
SAME: Regardless of CPI, same height
DIFF: As CPI, character heights vary.
10CPI
Specifies character pitch in this emulation.
SET-2
Specifies a character set.
IBM PPR
Setup
Character Set
- 92 -
Sets a number to SIDM Manual, MP and
Tray ID.
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
EPSON
Character Pitch
FX Setup
Sets a type of tray numbering in PostScript print job.
When [TYPE1] is selected: the tray numbering starts from 0.
When [TYPE2] is selected: the tray numbering starts from 1.
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
Factory
Default
Description
Symbol Set
IBM-437
Specifies a symbol set.
Letter O Style
Disable
Specifies the style that replaces 9BH with
letter o and 9DH with a zero.
Zero Character
Normal
Sets the zero to be slashed or unslashed.
Line Pitch
6LPI
Specifies the line spacing.
White Page Skip
OFF
Selects whether blank pages are printed
or not.
CR Function
CR
Selects whether a received carriage return
character (0Dh) also causes a line feed.
Line Length
80 Column
Specifies the number of characters per
line.
Form Length
11.7 inch
Specifies the length of paper.
TOF Position
0.0 inch
Specifies the distance of print from the top
edge of the paper.
Left Margin
0.0 inch
Specifies the distance of print from the left
hand edge of the paper.
Fit to Letter
Disable
Sets the printing mode that can fit print
data, equivalent to 11 inches (66 lines), in
the LETTER-size printable area.
Text Height
Same
Sets the height of a character.
SAME: Regardless of CPI, same height
DIFF: As CPI, character heights vary.
 Network Menu
Memo
 To enable the settings changed in the [Network Control] menu, the network card must be restarted. Follow the instructions on
the confirmation screen displayed when changing the settings, and restart the network card.
Item
Network TCP/IP
Setup
IP Version
Factory
Default
Description
Enable
Sets whether to enable TCP/IP.
IPv4
Selects the IP version.
IPv6 can be selected only by Telnet. When
IPv6 is selected by Telnet, the screen
before selecting items, [IPv6] is displayed, and on the screen after selecting
items, nothing is selected.
Display condition:TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
NetBEUI
Disable
Sets whether to enable NetBEUI.
NetBIOS over TCP
Enable
Sets whether to enable NetBIOS over TCP.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
NetWare
Disable
Sets whether to enable NetWare.
EtherTalk
Disable
Sets whether to enable EtherTalk.
Frame Type
Auto
Selects a frame type.
Display condition:Netware is enabled.
IP Address Set
Auto
Sets the method of setting up IP address.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
- 93 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
Factory
Default
Description
IPv4 Address
192.168.100. Sets an IP address.
100
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
Subnet Mask
255.255.255. Sets a subnet mask.
0.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
Sets a gateway address.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
DNS Server (Primary)
0.0.0.0
Sets an IP address for primary DNS
server. Display condition: TCP/IP protocol
is enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
DNS Server (Secondary)
0.0.0.0
Sets an IP address for secondary DNS
server. Display condition: TCP/IP protocol
is enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
WINS Server (Primary)
0.0.0.0
Sets a name or an IP address for the
WINS server.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
0.0.0.0
Sets a name or an IP address for the
WINS server.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled and the IP version is not set to
IPv6.
Web
Enable
Sets whether to enable access from a web
browser.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
Telnet
Disable
Sets whether to enable access from the
Telnet.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
FTP
Disable
Sets whether to enable access from FTP.
Display condition: TCP/IP protocol is
enabled.
IPSec
Disable
This item is displayed and it can be disabled only when IPSec is set to valid.
SNMP
Enable
Sets whether to enable access from SNMP.
Display condition: Netware is enabled and
TCP/IP is enabled.
Network Scale
Normal
When [Normal] is set: the machine works
effectively even when connected to a HUB
that has a spanning tree feature. However,
printer start up time gets longer when
computers are connected to two or three
small LANs.
When [Small] is set: computers can cover
from two or three small LANs to a largeLAN, but it may not work effectively when
it is connected to a HUB with a spanning
tree feature.
- 94 -
Configuring at the Operator Panel
WINS Server (Secondary)
6
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
Description
HUB Link Setting
Auto
Sets the hub linking method. Usually,
select [Auto].
Network PS-Protocol
RAW
Sets a PS-protocol.
Factory
Defaults
Mail
Server
Setup
Factory
Default
Execute
The settings of the network, mail server, LDAP
server, and secure protocol server are returned
to the default settings.
SMTP Server
(NULL)
Sets the IP address or host name for the
SMTP server.
SMTP Port
25
Sets the port number. Usually, the default
is used.
Available range: 1 to 65535
SMTP Encryption
None
Selects an encryption method in the SMTP
communication.
POP3 Server
(NULL)
Sets the IP address or host name for the
POP3 server.
POP3 Port
110
Sets the port number prepared by the
POP3 on the POP3 server.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
POP Encryption
None
Selects an encryption method or e-mail
transmission.
Authentication method
None
Sets the certification for e-mail transmission.
SMTP User ID
(NULL)
Sets a log-in name used for SMTP certification.
SMTP Password
(NULL)
Sets a log-in password used for SMTP certification.
POP User ID
(NULL)
Sets a log-in name onto the server used
for POP certification or for printing
attached files of received e-mails.
POP Password
(NULL)
Sets a lo-in password onto the server used
for POP certification or for printing
attached files of received e-mails.
- 95 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
LDAP
Server
Setting
Server Setting LDAP Server
Attribute
Description
(NULL)
Sets an IP address or host name for the
LDAP server.
Port No.
389
Sets a port number.
Available range: 1 to 65535.
Timeout
30 seconds
Sets the timeout value for the search
response from the LDAP server.
Available range: 10 to 120 seconds.
Max. Entries
100
Sets the maximum number of search results
from the LDAP server.
Search Root
(NULL)
Specifies a position to start searching the
LDAP directory.
Name1
cn
Specifies an attribute used for searching.
Name2
sn
Name3
givenName
E-mail Address
mail
Additional Filter
(NULL)
Authentication Method
Anonymous
Sets the certification method.
For Digest-MD5, the DNS server must be
set. For Secure Protocol, the secure protocol server must be set.
User ID
(NULL)
Sets a user ID for certification of the LDAP
server. Maximum 80 characters.
Display condition: the authentication
method for LDAP is not set to [Anonymous].
Password
(NULL)
Sets a certification password for the LDAP
server. Maximum 32 characters.
Display condition: the authentication
method for LDAP is not set to [Anonymous].
Encryption
None
Sets the encryption of communication
with the LDAP server.
Domain
(NULL)
Sets a realm name for the Kelberos certification.
Maximum 64 characters.
- 96 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Secure
Print
Server
Setting
Factory
Default
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
 Management
Factory
Default
Item
Description
Default Mode
Copy
Sets the default mode of the machine.
Operation
Clear
Operation Timeout
3
Sets time of automatic reset. Available
range: 1 to 10 minutes.
Clear After Job
OFF
Sets whether to reset after any job is
completed.
Sound
Control
Key Touch Tone Volume
Middle
Sets the volume of the key-touch tone.
FAX Buzzer Volume
Middle
Sets the volume for transmission complete
acknowledgment.
Soft Reset
Disable
Sets whether to enable the soft reset
command.
Speed
480 Mbps
Selects the maximum transfer speed of
USB interface.
USB PS-Protocol
RAW
Selects a USB PS-protocol.
Offline Receive
Disable
Sets whether to receive data in offline
state or in recoverable error state.
Serial Number
Enable
Sets whether to use a USB serial number.
Access Control
Disable
Sets access control.
User Authentication Method
Local
Display condition: [Access Control] is set
to [User] or [Password].
Unit of Measure
millimeter
Selects a displayed unit (millimeter / inch)
of measure.
Date Format
dd/mm/yyyy
Allow All Reports To Print
Disable
Sets whether to allow printing reports with
personal information.
Near Life LED
Enable
Sets whether to light an LED when a near
life warning occurs.
Status in Near Life
Enable
Sets whether a message is displayed when
a near life warning occurs.
Address Information Lock Time Out
3 minutes
Sets time until a lock is released by the
machine when address book, telephone
book, or profile is kept locked by the utilities. Available range: 1 to 10 minutes.
USB Memory Interface
Enable
When [Disable] is set. the scan to USB
and the print from USB memory functions
cannot be used.
Panel Contrast
0
Sets the LCD panel contrast. Available
range: ±10 (1 increments).
Power Save Time
30 minutes
Sets a time to enter the power save mode.
Sleep Time
10 minutes
Sets a time to enter the sleep mode.
Silent Mode
ON
Sets whether to enable the silent mode.
ECO Mode*1
ON
When [ON] is set: the machine starts a
small print job before the temperature of
the fixing device reaches the regulation
degree.
When [OFF] is set: the machine starts a
print job after the temperature of the fixing device reaches the regulation degree.
LocalInte USB Menu
rface*1
System
Setup
Power
Save
- 97 -
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
Item
Memory
Setup
Factory
Default
Description
Receive Buffer Size
Auto
Sets the reception buffer size that local
interface secures.
Resource Save
OFF
Sets the resource save area.
Initialize
Execute
Initializes flash memory.Display condition:[Limit for Initialization] is set to
[Disable].
SD Mem- Initialize
ory Card
Setup*1
Execute
Initializes an SD memory card. This item
is displayed in MC561dn only.
Display condition: [Limit for Initialization] is set to [Disable].
PCL
Formats a partition in an SD memory
card.This item is displayed in MC561dn only.
Display condition: [Limit for Initialization] is set to [Disable].
Flash
Memory
Setup*1
Format 
Partition
Common
PS
Storage
Maintenance
Setup
Check File
System
Execute
Resolves the un-match between the actual
free space and displayed free space of file
system and recovers the control data.
Erase SD Mem- Execute
ory Card
Deletes the data in an SD memory card.
This item is displayed in MC561dn only.
Enable
Sets whether to give permission to the
setup change accompanied by initialization of flash memory or an SD memory
card.
Encryption
Setup
Job Limitation
Disable
When [Encrypted Job only] is selected,
all requests for print except encrypted
authentication printing are ignored. This
item is displayed in MC561dn only.
Language
Maint
Setup
Initialize*1
Execute
Admin Password
Reset Settings*2
Job Log
Setup
Deletes downloaded message files.
aaaaaa
Execute
Deletes job macros, fax send/receive
data, and the history information and
returns the settings to the default.
Disable
Save Job Log*1
Clear Job Log*3 Execute
Print
Supplies Report
Statistics
Reset Main
Counter
Changes an administrator password. 6 to
12 characters are available.
Sets whether to save job logs.
Clears the saved job logs. Display condition:[Save Job Log] is set to [Enable].
Disable
Execute
Sets whether to print the consumable
counters' report.
Resets the main counter.
Reset Supplies Execute
Counter
Resets the consumable counter.
Display conditions: Setting [Consumable
Counter] to [Active]
*1 A message appears confirming you that making changes automatically restarts the system.
Select [Yes] to continue. Select [No] to cancel.
*2 A message appears confirming you that execution automatically restarts the system. Select
[Yes] to continue. Select [No] to cancel.
*3 A message appears confirming you that execution deleted all job logs. Select [Yes] to continue. Select [No] to cancel.
- 98 -
6
Configuring at the Operator Panel
Initial Lock
List of the Device Setting Menu Items
 User Install
Item
Time
Setup
Auto Setup
SNTP Server (Primary)
SNTP Server (Secondary)
Factory
Default
Description
Manual Setup Sets the SNTP server to use for setting the
current date and time. Maximum 64 characters.
Manual Setup
Sets the current date and time manually.
Time Zone
0:00
Sets your time zone in relation to GMT.
Available range: -12:00 to + 13:00. (15
minutes / increment)
Set Daylight Saving
ON
Sets whether to enable the Daylight 
Saving mode.
Power
Save
Power Save Enable
ON
Sets whether to enable the power save
mode.
Sleep
ON
Sets whether to enable the sleep mode.
High Humid Mode
OFF
Sets whether to enable the humidity
mode.
MF(Tone)/DP(Pulse)
Tone
Selects a dialing method.
Reception Mode
Fax Ready
Mode
Sets the reception mode.
DRD Type
Type1
Sets the DRD Type.
Dial Tone Detection
OFF
Sets whether to detect a dial tone.
Busy Tone Detection
OFF
Sets whether to detect a busy tone.
Monitor Control
OFF
Select any one from three choices: Not
to monitor. Monitor up to DIS. Execute
monitoring during communication.
Monitor Volume
Middle
Sets the Monitor Volume.
TTI Reg- TTI 1
ister/Edit
TTI 2
(NULL)
Registers or changes the transmission terminal identification (the name of a
sender). Maximum 22 characters.
Standard TTI
TTI 1
Selects the default sender's name from
the registered list.
TTI Number
(NULL)
Registers your fax number.
TTI Calendar Type
dd/mm/yyyy
Sets the calendar date format of sender's
information.
Super G3
ON
Sets whether to use Super G3 (ultra highspeed communication mode).
TTI 3
Erase Privacy Data*1
Execute
Deletes the registered privacy data.
Display condition: Job Accounting is disabled.
*1 A message appears confirming you that continuing deletes all settings and registered data.
Select [Yes] to continue. Select [No] to cancel.
Note
 If you use the machine for a long time when [Power Save] is [OFF], it may affect the lifetime of electronic components.
- 99 -
7. Useful Software
This chapter explains useful software functions for using your machine.
 List of Utilities
The following is a list of utilities that you can use for your machine. For details on how to use these
utilities, refer to each section.
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
Item
Function
Scope
Color Correct Utility
Printing
Profile Assistant *1
Printing
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility
Printing
Details
System
Requirements
Adjusts color matching It can  Windows 7/Windows
adjust the tone of palette
Vista/Windows Server
color output. Also, you can
2008 R2/Windows
adjust the hue and change the
Server 2008/Windows
overall shade of the color output.
XP/Windows Server
2003/Windows 2000
Registers and manages the
 Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.6
ICC profile on the machine's
hard disk. The registered ICC
profile uses custom match on
the printer drivers' [Graphic
Pro] mode
Refer to
page 135
page 133
You can adjust the density of
pictures by adjusting the
CMYK color and halftone
density of each color.
page 141
7
Managing
the
machine
Sets the user name and job
account ID to the print driver.
page 114
page 123
Network Card Setup
Machine
settings
You can configure settings for
the network
page 117
page 124
Operator Panel language
setup/Panel language setup
Machine
settings
You can change the operating
panel or menu display language
page 116
page 123
Windows Utilities
Item
Configuration Tool
Function
Scope
Machine
settings
Details
You can change the access
control settings and menu on
the machine, and register email addresses, speed dial
numbers, profiles, PIN
numbers, auto delivery
settings and network scan
settings.
- 100 -
System
Requirements
Windows 7/Windows
Vista/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server
2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
Windows 2000 requires
the following to be installed
 Service Pack 4
 Internet Explorer 5.5
SP1 or a higher version
 KB891861 (http://
support.microsoft.com/
?kbid=891861)
Refer to
page 105
Useful Software
Print Control client/Print
Control
List of Utilities
Item
Function
Scope
Details
Color Swatch utility
Printing
Prints a color swatch. You can
use this utility to check
printed colors. This utility is
automatically installed when
installing a print driver.
PDF Print Direct
Printing
Prints out PDF files without
launching any applications.
ActKey
Scan
OKI LPR Utility
System
Requirements
Refer to
Windows 7/Windows
Vista/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server
2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
page 140
Instantly opens the reader.
Also, you can use this to set
reading settings.
Windows 7/Windows
Vista/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server
2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
page 45
Printing
You can print a document via
the network connection,
manage print jobs, and check
the machine status.
Windows 7/Windows
Vista/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server
2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
page 118
TELNET *2
Machine
settings
You can do network settings
for the machine.
page 121
Storage Device Manager *1
Printing
Registers and deletes form
Windows 7/Windows
data and manages saved jobs. Vista/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server
2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
page 112
Web Driver Installer *1
Managing
the
machine
Is connected to the network,
Windows XP/Windows
and manages Okidata printers Server 2003/Windows
or combined units.
2000/Windows NT4.0
For details, refer to the
Okidata website.
-
PrintSuperVision *1
Managing
the
machine
This is a web-based
application which manages
printers connected to the
network. You can use this to
check setting information and
information on consumables
for multiple devices.
Windows 7/Windows
Vista/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server
2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
For details, refer to the
Okidata website.
-
Network Extension
Managing
the
machine
You can check the machine
settings from the print driver,
and can set options. This
utility is automatically
installed when installing a
print driver through a network
connection.
Windows 7/Windows
page 120
Vista/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server
2008/Windows XP/
Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000
A computer operating with
TCP/IP.
- 101 -
page 114
Installing Utilities
Mac OS X Utilities
Item
Network Scanner Setup Tool
*1
*2
Function
Scope
Scan
System
Requirements
Details
Is initially launched when a
Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.6
scanner driver is selected from
an application, and you can
select the target equipment to
connect to.
It is not necessary to set the
connection target after the
first time.
Refer to
page 125
The utility that comes with *1 is on the Software CD-ROM.Please download this from the
Okidata website.
TELNET is a function supported for OS.
 Installing Utilities
For Mac OS X
Installing from the Software
CD-ROM
If there is a utility that you would like to use,
follow the procedure below for Windows. For Mac
OS X, you can copy it by dragging and dropping
to the place you want. You can also run this
directly from the Software CD-ROM
1
Insert the Software CD-ROM into the
computer
2
Double click on the [OKI]>[Utility]
folder.
3
Copy the folder you want to install by
dragging and dropping to the folder you
want.
Memo
Memo
 To start up, double click on the utility icon within the folder.
For Windows
1
Insert the Software CD-ROM into your
computer
2
Click [Run setup.exe].
Download from the Okidata
website and install.
If there is a utility you want to use, follow the
procedure below.
[If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3
Select the model and click [Next].
Utilities common to Windows/Mac
OS X
4
Read the user license agreement and
click on [I Agree].
1
Access the Okidata website.
2
Select the utility you want to use, and
follow the instructions on screen to
download it.
3
Double click on the icon downloaded onto
your computer.
4
Follow the instructions on the screen to
install.
5
Click on [Device Configuration] or on
[Optional Software].
6
Select the utility you would like to install.
7
Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation.
8
Click [Finish].
- 102 -
Useful Software
 For Windows, if you have PaperPort installed, you can
install this from the Application CD-ROM.
7
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
 Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
This section explains webpages that can be used by both Windows and Mac OS X.
When using webpages, the following conditions must be met.
 TCP/IP must be enabled.
 One of the following must be installed: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, Safari 3.0 or later, or Firefox 3.0
or later.
Memo
 Either set your webpage security settings to a medium level, or enable cookies.
 [In order to access the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is required. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Log in as the administrator.
Webpage
You can carry out the following operations from
the webpage.
Note
 You must be authorized as the administrator.
 Display the machine status.
Memo
 Create profiles.
 The default administrator password of the machine is
"aaaaaa".
 Configure tray, network, function default, and
machine settings.
 Display the job list.
1
Click on [Administrator Login] on the
main page.
2
Enter "root" in [Username] and enter
the administrator password in
[Password], and then click [OK].
 Print out a PDF without a printer driver.
 Configure the auto delivery and transmission data
save functions.
 Link to frequently used webpages.
Memo
 In order to change the machine settings on the webpage,
you need to be logged in as the administrator.
Reference
 For details on how to configure the network settings, refer
to "Changing Network Settings From the Web Page" P. 162.
Access the machine webpage.
1
Launch your web browser.
2
Type in "http:// (machine's IP address)"
in the address bar and press the
<Enter> key.
Reference
 For the machine's IP address, please refer to the
User's Manual Basic.
- 103 -
For Mac OS X, type in "root" for [Name] and enter
the machine administrator's password in
[Password], and then click [Login].
Utilities common to Windows/Mac OS X
3
Checking Machine Status
Click [SKIP].
If you have made changes to the settings on this
screen, click [OK].
You can check the status of your machine from
the webpage.
1
Launch your web browser and enter the
machine's IP address.
The status of the machine is displayed.
Memo
 When logging in as the administrator, you can also click on
[Status Window] in order to view the simplified display
of the machine status.
Changing Machine Settings
You can change the main unit's settings from the
webpage.
The menus available only for the administrator will
be displayed.
Changing the Administrator's
password.
1
Launch your web browser and log in as
the administrator.
2
Change the settings and click [Send].
Get the Date and Time Automatically
You can change the machine administrator's
password from the webpage. The administrator's
password set on the webpage can be used when
logging into the machine through the control
panel or through webpage.
You can get date and time information
automatically from an internet time server, and
reflect this on your machine.
Launch your web browser and log in as
the administrator.
2
Select [Administrator Setup].
3
Select [Initial Operating Settings]>
[Time Setup].
4
Specify your time zone.
Memo
 The password should be 6-12 characters long, and should
be in half-byte (normal English) characters.
 The password is case sensitive.
1
Launch your web browser and enter the
machine's IP address.
2
Select [Administration Settings].
5
Select [Automatic] from [Set time].
3
Select [Management]>
[Administrator Password].
6
Enter the SNTP server in [SNTP Server
(Primary)].
4
Enter a new password in [New
Password].
7
If required, enter another SNTP server in
[SNTP Server (Secondary)].
5
Reenter the password in [Confirm
Password].
8
Click on [Send].
The network system reboots to enable the new
settings.
The entered password will not be displayed. Write
down your password and store it in a safe place.
6
Click on [Send].
The network system reboots to enable the new
settings.
Memo
 When using SNTP, you cannot set the time from the
operating panel.
Memo
 You do not need to restart the machine. Next time when
you log in as the administrator, use the new password.
- 104 -
7
Useful Software
1
Windows Utilities
 Windows Utilities
This section explains utilities you can use in Windows.
Memo
 When using the User Setting plugin, the administrator password is required. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Setup
Configuration Tool
Plugins can be installed, as required.
In the Configuration Tool, you can manage
multiple units and change settings.
The following 4 types of plugin are available.
 User Setting Plugin
 Device Setting Plugin
 Alert Info Plugin
 Network Setting Plugin
1
Insert the Software CD-ROM into the
computer.
A window is displayed.
The Configuration Tool functions are as follows.
 Display device information
2
[Configuration Tools] from [Optional
Software].
3
Select the plugin to install.
4
Specify the folder into which you would
like the software to install.
 Device menu settings
The initial setting for this is C:/Program Files/
Okidata/Configuration Tool.
 Copy device settings
 Change device password
 Register and edit email addresses, speed dial
numbers, PINs, and network scan addresses
5
Click on [Install].
6
If a message is displayed saying that
installation is complete, click on [Close].
 Register and edit device profile
 Set access control
Memo
 Register and edit auto delivery
 You can install additional plugins later.
 Sort list of emails, speed dial numbers, profiles, and
network scan addresses
Registering the Machine
To use the Configuration Tool in Windows 2000,
you need to have the following installed.
 Service Pack 4
 Internet Explorer 5.5 SP1 or a higher version
 KB891861 (http://support.microsoft.com/
?kbid=891861)
When using the Configuration Tool or introducing
a new machine, register the machine in the
Configuration Tool.
1
Select [Start], [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Configuration Tool]>
[Configuration Tool].
2
Select [Register Device] from the
[Tools] menu.
Search results are displayed.
3
Select the machine and click on
[Register].
4
On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
- 105 -
Windows Utilities
Removing a Machine
Icon
Return to the main page.
You can removes a registered machine
1
Details
 Exporting Addresses to a File.
Right-click on the machine from
[Registered device Table].
1
Select machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2
Select [Remove device].
3
On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [E-mail Address Manager].
Check the Status of the Machine.
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
6
Enter the folder name and name of the
folder to be saved to, and click on
[Save].
Check the status and information of the machine.
1
2
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
Select the [Device Info] tab.
Memo
.
Note
 After exporting, an edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
 If you want to update information, click on [Update
Device Information].
 Importing Addresses from a File.
Set the Email Address
1
Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
With the User Setting plugin, you can register the
machine's email address or edit it.
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
The following explains some of the functions.
3
Click on [E-mail Address Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
 For how to install the plugin, please refer to "Setup" P. 105.
6
Select [Open] from [Select CSV File].
 Icon
7
Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
8
Click on [Next].
9
Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
Note
 When using the following functions, please install the User
Setting plugin.
.
Reference
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Icon
Details
Registers a new email
address.
Registers a new email
address group.
Saves settings on the
machine.
Deletes the selected item.
10 Click
.
Memo
 CSV files exported by Outlook Express (Windows email and
Windows Live email) can also be restored.
Deletes the selected item and
moves other items up.
Deletes all items.
Exports current settings to a
file.
Imports settings from a file.
- 106 -
7
Useful Software
 When the machine is connected to the network, [Device
Status] will be displayed.
Windows Utilities
Set Speed Dials
5
Click
You can register and edit speed dials on the
machine.
6
Select [Open] from [Select CSV File].
7
Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
8
Click on [Next].
9
Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
The following explains some of the functions.
Note
 When using the speed dial manager, please install the User
Setting plugin.
Reference
 For how to install the plugin, please refer to "Setup" P. 105.
10 Click
 Icon
.
Memo
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Icon
.
 CSV files exported by Outlook Express (Windows email and
Windows Live email) can also be restored.
Details
Setting Profiles
Register a new speed dial
number.
You can register and edit machine profiles.
Register a new speed dial
number group.
The following explains some of the functions.
Note
Memo
 The functions of the other icons are the same as explained
in "Set the Email Address" P. 106.
 When using the profile manager, please install the User
Setting plugin.
Reference
Reference
 For details on icons, please refer to "Icon" P. 106.
 For how to install the plugin, please refer to "Setup" P. 105.
 Exporting Speed Dials to a File.
 Icon
1
Select the machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on the [Speed Dial Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
6
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Icon
Details
Registers a new profile.
Copies the details of items
for which you have checked
the checkbox, and creates a
new profile.
.
Memo
 The functions of the other icons are the same as explained
in "Set the Email Address" P. 106.
Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
Reference
 For details on icons, please refer to "Icon" P. 106.
Note
 After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
 Import Speed Dials from a File.
1
Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on the [Speed Dial Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
- 107 -
Windows Utilities
 Exporting Profiles to a File.
1
Select machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [Profile Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
6
Check the contents of the displayed
message and click [OK].
7
Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
Setting a PIN
You can control access to the machine.
 Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Icon
Details
Registers a new PIN.
Registers a new user.
.
 Create a new PIN
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
6
Enter the PIN number you would like to
use.
Note
 After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
 Importing Profiles from a File.
1
Select machine from which to import,
from [Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [Profile Manager].
7
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
Check each item as required and click
[OK].
8
Click
6
Check the contents of the displayed
message text and click on [OK].
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
7
Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
8
Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Select the PIN number for which you
want to change the settings.
6
Change settings as required and click on
[OK].
7
Click
 Changing PIN Settings
.
.
 Deleting a PIN
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
- 108 -
Useful Software
Click
Click
7
.
5
9
.
.
Windows Utilities
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Select the checkbox for the PIN you want
to delete.
5
Click
Click
6
Enter username and password.
6
On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
7
7
Select either an existing PIN from [PIN
Number], or select [Create New].
8
When selecting [Create New], enter the
PIN number into [New PIN Number],
set each value as required, and click
[OK].
9
Click [Close].
8
Click
.
.
 Exports the PIN to a file.
1
Select machine from which to export,
from the [Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
10 Click
.
.
Memo
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
6
Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
.
 "Admin" cannot be registered as a new username.
 Changing User Settings
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Select username to change.
Note
 After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
 Imports PINs from a file.
1
Select machine from which to import,
from [Registered Device Table].
6
Change settings as required and click on
[OK].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
7
Click
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
 Deleting Users
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
5
Click
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
6
Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
7
Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
8
Click
5
Select the checkbox for the user you
want to delete.
6
Click
.
.
 Creating a New User
.
.
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
7
On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
8
Click
3
Click on [PIN Manager].
- 109 -
.
Windows Utilities
Set a network scan
8
You can register and edit address to use for
network scans.
 Deletes network scan settings
.
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
Details
3
Click on [Network Scan Manager].
Register a new network scan
send destination.
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Select the sending destination you would
like to delete.
6
Click
 Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Icon
Click
Memo
 The functions of the other icons are the same as explained
in "Set the Email Address" P. 106.
Reference
 Regarding icons, please refer to "Icon" P. 106.
 Exports network scan settings to a
file.
1
Select device from which to export, from
the [Registered Device Table].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [Network Scan Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
6
Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
.
Device Setting Plugin
With the Device Setting plugin, you can change
the machine menu and copy settings to another
device.
 Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Icon
Details
Save the device settings
displayed on the screen to a
file.
.
 Save settings to a file.
Note
 After exporting, the edited CSV file may not restore
properly.
 Imports network scan settings
from a file.
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3
Click on [Menu settings].
1
Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
4
Click
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
5
3
Click on [Network Scan Manager].
Enter the file name, select the folder to
save the file to, and click [Save].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Click
6
Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
7
Select the import settings and click on
[Import].
.
.
 Restoring Settings from a File
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3
Click on [Menu settings].
4
Click
5
Check the details of the displayed
message and click [Yes].
- 110 -
.
Useful Software
Restore file settings saved on
an external file.
7
Windows Utilities
6
7
 Filter Settings
Select the file you would like to restore
and click [Open].
Click
You can set display alert conditions for sending or
receiving a fax, printing, or sending and
receiving emails and internet faxes.
.
1
Select the machine from the
[Registered Device Table].
Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
2
Select [Filter settings].
2
Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3
3
Click on [Change password].
Click on the event button you would like
to set.
4
Enter the current password and new
password and click [OK].
4
Change the settings as required.
5
Click on [OK].
 Setting Passwords
1
Memo
Alert Info Plugin
 Up to 100 senders can be registered as e-mail, internet
fax, or fax sender.
You can use the Alert Info plug-in to display a
message on your computer when a job finishes.
With this software, an "Event" is called when a
job is completed.
Note
 The Alert Info plugin can be used with devices connected
to the network.
 Set the time and time zone of the machine to those of your
computer.
 Basic Settings
You can check whether there are any records
registered for the machine, from the event log.
1
Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
2
Select [Display log].
Memo
 You can check the total number of recorded events in [Log
Number List].
You can set basic settings of the Alert-Info
plugin.
 You can see details of recorded logs in [Log details]
1
Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
2
Select [Basic settings].
3
Change the settings as required.
4
Click on [Update].
Network Setting Plugin
You can set the network with the Configuration
Tool. Prior to setting, please install the Network
Setting plugin.
Reference
 For details on how to make network settings, please refer
to "Changing Network Settings From the Web Page" P. 162.
 Device Settings
The Alert Info plugin settings can be changed for
each device
1
 Checking Logs
 Icon
The meaning of each icon is as shown below.
Select [Alert Info] from the [Plug-ins]
menu.
Icon
Details
Searches again for the
machine.
2
Select [Setting devices].
3
Click on [Update device].
Changes search conditions
for machine.
4
Select the device you would like to set.
Changes IP address for a
machine.
5
Change the settings as required and click
on [OK].
Restarts the machine.
Changes network password.
Displays the set machine
webpage.
- 111 -
Windows Utilities
 Searches for the machine on the
network
 Cloning user settings
You can copy machine settings to a different
device.
Searches for the machine.
1
Select [Network Setting] from the
[Plug-in] menu.
1
Select the source to be cloned from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Select [Discovery Devices].
2
Select the [User Setting] tab.
3
Click on [Cloning].
4
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5
Select target to be cloned to and cloning
settings
6
Click on [Execute].
7
Enter the password for the target to be
cloned to and click on [OK].
Search results are displayed.
 Set search conditions
1
Select [Network Setting] from the
[Plug-in] menu.
2
Select [Environment Setting]
3
Set the search settings as required and
click [OK].
 Change the IP Address
Results are displayed.
Changes IP address for the machine.
1
Select the machine from the device list.
2
Click
3
Change the settings as required.
4
Click on [OK].
5
Enter the network password and click
[OK].
.
Storage Device Manager
With the Storage Device Manager, you can
register or delete the form data and manage
saved jobs.
7
6
Useful Software
The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the MAC address
Click on [OK] to restart the machine.
Cloning Settings
 Cloning machine settings
You can copies machine settings to a different
device.
1
Select the source to be cloned from the
[Registered Device Table].
2
Click on the [Device Setting] tab.
3
Click on [Cloning].
4
Select the target to be cloned to and
click [Execute].
5
Enter the password for the cloning
source and target and click on [OK].
Note
 If you want to access to the PS partition, register a form,
do a test printing of a form or print a job stored in the SD
memory card, set [Job Restriction] to [Disable].
Install
Note
 Storage Device Manager is not on the Software CD-ROM.
Download the installation file from the Okidata website.
1
Double click on the EXE file downloaded
from the Okidata website.
Launch the installer.
2
- 112 -
Install Storage Device Manager
according to instructions.
Windows Utilities
Start Up
1
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[OKI Storage
Device Manager]>[OKI Storage
Device Manager].
Register Forms (Form Overlay)
2
On the [Discover Printers] screen,
select the port for connection to the
machine and click on [Start].
3
Click [Exit].
4
Select [New Project] from the
[Projects] menu.
5
Select [Add File to Project] from the
[Projects] menu, and select the created
form.
You can create and register overlays such as
logos for printing. This explains how to register
forms
The form is added to the project.
Reference
 For how to print overlays, please refer here "Overlay
Printing (for MC561dn Only)" P. 64.
6
Double click on the form file.
7
Enter the [ID], and click [OK].
Note
Memo
 [Do not change [Volume] and [Password].
 When using a Windows PS printer driver, administrator
rights are required.
Memo
 The Windows PCL XPS printer driver cannot be used.
 When using the Windows PS printer driver, enter
[Name].
 Create a form.
1
Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
2
Right click on the MC561 icon, and select
[Properties]>[OKI MC561(*)].
8
Select the Printer from the window on
the bottom
9
Select [Send Project Files to Printer]
from the [Projects] menu.
*Select the required driver type
10 Click on [OK].
3
Select the [Ports] tab, check [FILE:]
from [Print Port], and click on [OK].
11 Close the Storage Device Manager.
4
Create a form you want to register on
the Printer.
Check the Free Space in SD Memory
Cards or Flash Memory.
When using the Windows PCL printer driver, go to
step 9.
5
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
6
Click on [Preferences].
7
Select the [Job Options] tab, and click
on [Overlay].
8
9
You can check the free space in SD memory
cards and flash memory.
1
Launch the Storage Device Manager.
2
On the [Discover Printers] screen,
select the port connected to the machine
and click on [Start].
Select [Create Form].
3
Click [Exit].
Start a print job.
4
Select the machine from the window on
the bottom.
5
Select [Show Resource(s)] from the
[Printers] menu.
6
When checking the SD memory card,
select [SD0]. When checking the flash
card, select [FLASH0].
7
Select [Details] from the [View] menu.
10 Enter the file name you would like to
save.
11 Return to [Printer Port]from the
[Ports] tab.
 Register a Form on the printer
Using the Storage Device Manager
1
Launch the Storage Device Manager.
The partition list will be displayed, and the empty
space will be shown in units of bytes.
- 113 -
Windows Utilities
Delete Unwanted Jobs from an SD
Memory Card
2
Right-click on the PDF you would like to
print, and select [PDF Print Direct].
A window is displayed.
You can delete print jobs in an SD memory card's
[COMMON] partition.
3
When setting the user verification function on the
selected printer driver, select [User Auth] from
the [Printer Settings] menu.
Memo
 After Secure Printing or Storing print data, the job will
remain in the [COMMON] partition. If it is not deleted the
capacity of the SD card will decrease.
4
Note
 Encrypted Secure prints cannot be deleted on the Storage
Device Manager.
1
Launch the Storage Device Manager.
2
On the [Discover Printers] screen,
select the port connected to the Printer
and click on [Start].
3
Click [Exit].
4
Select the Printer from the window on
the bottom.
5
Select [HDD/SD Print Jobs] from the
[Printers] menu.
6
Confirm that [Secure Jobs] is selected
and select [View User Jobs].
7
Enter the password and click on [Apply
PIN].
Select [View All Jobs], enter the
administrator password, and click on
[Apply Password] to display all Secure
Jobs stored on the Printer.
9
Click on [OK].
Print Control Client
This is client software for Print Control. You can
set the user name and Job Account ID in the
print driver.
7
Note
 If you carry out an update and reinstallation of the printer
driver, it will be in non-compatible mode, so please set it
back to job account mode. However, if you are using a
function with all the printer drivers set to the same mode,
you do not need to set the mode back.
Setting the user name and job
account ID.
Can set the user name and job account ID in the
printer driver properties.
PDF Print Direct
You can send a PDF file to the machine and print
it directly . With PDF Print Direct, the procedure
for opening PDF files with applications such as
Adobe Reader has been shortened.
1
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Control
Client]>[Change Print Control Mode].
2
Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
Print a PDF file.
1
Change the setting as required and click
on [Print].
Check that there is the [OKI MC561(*)]
icon in the [Devices and Printers]
folder.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode
for All drivers.].
3
Select [Tab] and click on [Change].
A window is displayed.
- 114 -
Useful Software
Select the job you want to delete and
click [Cancel Job(s)].
If you want to print an encrypted file, put
a check in [Set Password] and enter
the password.
In order to use the same password after this, click
on [Save Password].
5
The default administrator password is
"PASSWORD".
8
Select the printer driver from [Select
Printer].
Windows Utilities
Set a job account ID for each user in
Hide mode.
4
Click on [OK].
5
Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
6
Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
7
Right click on the printer icon and select
[Printer Properties].
8
Select the [Print Control] tab, enter the
user name and job account ID, and click
on [OK].
The system manager can create and register
beforehand an ID file with the job account ID and
user name for the user name to log in to
Windows. The user does not need to enter their
user name and job account ID at the time of
printing, as they can be identified with this
software.
Hide mode can be used for shared printers.
1
Setting Pop-Up Mode
Memo
When using this function, you need to enter a
user name and job account ID when starting
printing.
 ID files are registered in the following order.
Username, (the username entered when logging into
Windows), User ID (the user ID corresponding to the
username), and Username (the username used for
Print Control).
Note
 The user name can be omitted. If it is omitted, the
login name will be used as the username.
 Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008 do not use this function.
1
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Control
Client]>[Change Print Control Mode].
2
Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
3
 Each item is separated with a comma.
 For spreadsheet software, each line has one user, with
a login name, job account ID and user name.
2
The file should be saved in a CSV
extension format.
3
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Control
Client]>Select [Change Print Control
Mode].
4
Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
Select [Popup] and click on [Change].
A window is displayed.
4
Click on [OK].
5
Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
An ID file can be created in Notepad or
using spreadsheet software.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
Note
 If using a shared printer, please do not use the
function setting all print drivers to the same mode. If
printing on the client side of a shared printer, account
information will not be output.
5
Select [Hide] and click on [Change].
6
Click on [OK].
7
Select [Import ID File] from the [Hide
Mode] menu.
8
Specify a file created in step 1 and click
[Open].
9
Uncheck [Set fixed Job Account ID for
all users]from the [Hide Mode] menu.
10 Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
- 115 -
Windows Utilities
Allocates the same ID to all users in
hide mode.
1
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Control
Client]>[Change Print Control Mode].
2
Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
Operator Panel Language Setup
You can change the operating panel display
language
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
3
Select [Hide] and click on [Change].
A window is displayed.
Note
4
Click on [OK].
5
Select [Set fixed Job Account ID for
all users] from the [Hide Mode] menu.
6
Select [Setup Fixed Job Account ID]
from the [Hide Mode] menu.
 This program uses the print driver. Please install the
printer driver on the computer beforehand.
Starting Up
1
Turn on the machine.
7
Enter the user name and job account ID
and click on [OK].
2
Plug in the computer, and insert the
Software CD-ROM.
8
Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
3
Click [Run setup.exe].
If the [User Account
appears, click [Yes].
Do not Distinguish Between Users
1
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Print Control
Client]>[Change Print Control Mode].
2
Select the driver you would like to set
from the driver list.
If you would like all printer drivers to be set to the
same mode, click on [Set the same mode for All
drivers].
3
Select [Not Supported] and click on
[Change].
4
Click on [OK].
5
Select [Close] from the [File] menu.
4
Select the model and click [Next].
5
Read the user license agreement and
click [I Agree].
6
Select [Device Configuration].
7
Click [Operator Panel Language
Setup].
8
Click on [Next].
9
Select the machine and click [Next].
10 Select the model name of the machine
and click on [Next].
11 Select the language and click on [Next].
12 Click on [Menu Print] and click on
[Next].
13 Check whether the printed menu
language format value in step 12 is in
the value range displayed on the screen.
14 Click on [Next].
15 Check the contents of the settings and
click on [Setup].
- 116 -
7
Useful Software
This recognizes all jobs as having unregistered
IDs. The user name left in the Windows login
name and job account ID is "0". If it is not
necessary to distinguish between users, use "Not
supported Mode".
Control] dialog box
Windows Utilities
Configuring Network Settings
16 Click [Finish].
17 Check that the language you want is
1
Launch Network Card Setup.
2
Select the machine from a list.
3
Select [Printer Settings] from the
[Settings] menu.
 If the language selection screen is not selected, carry
out the following procedure.
4
a)[Click on [Start] and select [Search for
Programs and Files].
Change the items as required and click
on [Settings].
5
Enter your password into [Enter
Password] and click on [OK].
displayed is on the screen of the
machine.
18 Restart the machine.
Note
b)Enter "D:/Utilities/PanelDwn/
oppnlngs.exe" and press the <Enter>
key.
(This example shows a case with the
DVD-ROM drive (D:))
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the Ethernet address.
- The password is case sensitive.
6
c)Follow step 8.
Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
The machine restarts to enable the new settings.
During the restart, the machine status icon
changes to red. The machine will restart, the new
settings will become active, and the status icon
will turn green.
Network Card Setup
You can use the Network Card Setup to configure
the network.
Set Web settings
You can launch the webpage, and set the main
unit network.
 Enable Web Settings
In order to use Network Card Setup, TCP/IP
needs to be activated.
1
Launch Network Card Setup.
2
Select the machine from the list.
3
Select [Printer Settings] from the
[Settings] menu.
4
Select the [Printer Settings (Web)]
tab.
5
Select [Printer Settings (Web) Active] and click on [Settings].
6
Enter your password into [Enter
Password] and click on [OK].
Note
 This requires administrator rights.
Memo
 To check the machine MAC address, press the <SETTINGS>
key, and on the machine operating panel select [View
Information]>[Network].
Launching the Utility
1
Turn on the machine.
2
Turn on you computer, and insert the
Software CD-ROM.
3
Click [Run setup.exe].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
4
Select the model and click [Next].
5
Read the user license agreement and
click on [I Agree].
6
Select [Device Configuration]>
[Network Card Setup].
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the ethernet address.
- The password is case sensitive.
7
Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
The network card restarts to enable the new
settings. During the restart, the machine status
icon changes to red. The machine network card
will restart, the new settings will be active, and
the status icon will turn green.
- 117 -
Windows Utilities
 Opening a Webpage
1
Launch Network Card Setup.
2
Select your machine from the list.
3
Select [View Web Page] from the
[Setting] menu.
OKI LPR Utility
You can perform a print job via network, manage
print jobs, check the machine status by the
utility.
The webpage will restart, and the machine status
page will be displayed.
Changing the Password.
In order to use OKI LPR Utility, TCP/IP must be
activated.
1
Launch Network Card Setup.
2
Select your machine from the list.
3
Select [Change Password] from the
[Setting] menu.
 The OKI LPR utility cannot be used for shared printers.
4
Enter the current password.
Launching the Utility
Note
 Please use the standard TCP/IP port.
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the ethernet address.
1
- The password is case sensitive.
5
Enter the new password, and reenter it
for confirmation.
The password is case sensitive.
6
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs] ([Program] in windows
2000)>[Okidata]>[OKI LPR
Utility]>[OKI LPR Utility].
Adding a Printer
Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
You can add a printer to the OKI LPR utility.
Change the Environment.
7
Note
 This requires administrator rights.
 If you cannot add a printer in Windows 7/Windows Vista/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008, shut
down OKI LPR utility first and right-click on [Start] > [All
Programs] > [Okidata] > [OKI LPR Utility] > [OKI
LPR Utility], and select [Run as administrator] to
launch.
1
Launch Network Card Setup.
2
Select your machine from the list.
3
Select [Environment Settings] from
the [Option] menu.
 You cannot add the printer which already registered at OKI
LPR utility. If you want to change the port, select [Confirm
Connections] in [Remote Print] menu.
4
Set the settings as required and click
[OK].
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select [Add Printer] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
3
Select [Printer Name] and enter the IP
address.
Memo
Network printers and printers connected to the
LPR port are not displayed.
4
When selecting a network printer, select
[Discover].
5
Click on [OK].
- 118 -
Useful Software
You can configure the machine search condition,
time-out value for each setting, and items to be
displayed on the list.
Windows Utilities
Downloading Files
Forwarding Jobs Automatically
You can download a file to the printer you have
added to the OKI LPR utility.
If you cannot print because the selected printer
is busy, offline or out of paper, you can configure
the settings forward the print jobs to another
OKI model printer automatically.
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select the download destination printer.
3
4
Select [Download] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
 Before forwarding a job, you need to add another same
OKI model printer.
Select a file and click on [Open].
 This requires administrator rights.
Displaying the Machine Status
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select a printer.
3
Select [Printer Status] from [Remote
Print].
Note
 Print jobs can only be forwarded to the same OKI model
printer as the one you are using.
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select the printer you would like to set.
3
Select [Confirm Connections] from
[Remote Print] menu.
4
Click on [Advanced].
5
Select the [Enable Automatic Job
Redirect]checkbox.
6
For forwarding jobs only when errors
occur, check [Redirect only when an
error occurs].
7
Click on [Add].
8
Enter the forwarding destination IP
address and click on [OK].
9
Click on [OK].
Checking/Deleting/Forwarding Jobs
You can confirm and delete print jobs also, if you
cannot print because the selected printer is busy,
offline or out of paper, you can forward the print
jobs to another OKI model printer.
Note
 Print jobs can only be forwarded to the same OKI model
printer as the one you are using.
 Before forwarding a job, you need to add another same
OKI model printer.
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
Print with Multiple Printers
2
Select [Job Status] from the [Remote
Print] menu.
You can print with multiple printers with a single
command.
3
If you want to delete a print job, select
the job and then select [Delete] from
the [Job] menu.
 This function sends remote print jobs to multiple printers
and prints simultaneously.
4
Note
If you want to forward a print job, select
the job and then select [Forward] from
the [Job] menu.
 This requires administrator rights.
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select the printer you would like to configure.
3
Select printer [Confirm Connections]
from [Remote Print] menu.
4
Click on [Advanced].
5
Select the [Print to more than one
printer at a time] checkbox.
6
Click on [Options].
7
Click on [Add].
- 119 -
Windows Utilities
8
Enter the IP address of the printer for
simultaneously printing and click on [OK].
9
Click on [OK].
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select [Setup] from the [Option] menu.
3
Select the [Auto Reconnect] checkbox
and click on [OK].
Open a Webpage
You can open the machine webpage from the OKI
LPR utility.
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select a printer.
3
Select [Web Setting] from the
[Remote Print] menu.
Uninstall the OKI LPR Utility
Note
 This requires administrator rights.
1
Confirm (or Ensure) that the OKI LPR
utility is closed.
2
Click on [Start], and then select [All
Program] ([Program] in Windows
2000)>[Okidata]>[OKI LPR
Utility]>[Uninstall OKI LPR Utility].
[If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3
On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
Memo
 You cannot open the webpage when the web port
number has been changed. Carry out the following
procedure, and reconfigure the OKI LPR utility port
number.
a)Select a printer.
b)Select [Confirm Connections] from
[Remote Print].
c)Click on [Advanced].
d)Enter the port number into [Port Number].
e)Click on [OK].
Network Extension
In Network Extension you can check the settings
on the machine and set the composition of the
options.
Adding Comments to Printers
1
Launch the OKI LPR utility.
2
Select a printer.
3
Select [Confirm Connections] from
[Remote Print].
4
Enter a comment and click on [OK].
5
Select [Show comments] from the
[Option] menu.
Useful Software
You can add comments to the printers added into
the OKI LPR utility, in order to identify them.
In order to use Network Extension, TCP/IP must
be activated.
Automatically Configuring the IP
Address
Note
 This requires administrator rights.
You can set it to ensure that the connection with
the original printer is maintained, even if the
printer's IP address is changed.
Memo
 The IP address may change if DHCP is being used to
dynamically assign IP addresses or the network
administrator manually changes the printer's IP address.
7
Memo
 Network Extension is automatically installed when
installing a print driver through a TCP/IP network.
 The Network Extension is operated by linking with the
print driver. You cannot opt to only have Network
Extension installed.
 Network Extension only functions when the printer driver
is connected to OKI LPR port or the standard TCP/IP port.
Note
 This requires administrator rights.
- 120 -
Windows Utilities
Launch the Utility
 For Windows PS Drivers
To use Network Extension, open the printer
properties screen.
1
1
2
Launch the printer properties screen.
Reference
 "Launch the Utility"
Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
Right click on the printer icon and select
[Printer Properties].
Check Machine Settings
You can check the settings of the machine.
2
Select the [Device Settings] tab.
3
Click on [Get installable options
automatically] and then click on
[Setup].
4
Click [OK].
Uninstall the Utility
Memo
 If you use Network Extension in an environment that is not
supported, the [Option] tab may not be displayed.
1
1
Click on [Start], and then select
[Control Panel]>[Add or Remove
Programs].
2
Select [OKI Network Extension] and
click on [Remove].
3
Follow the instructions on the screen and
complete the uninstallation.
Open the printer properties screen.
Reference
 "Launch the Utility"
2
Select the [Status] tab.
3
Click [Update].
4
Click [OK].
TELNET
Reference
You can configure each type of setting with a
Telnet command.
 Click [Web Setting] to automatically launch the
webpage. You can change machine settings on this
webpage screen. For details, refer to "Webpage" P. 103.
Note
 Telnet access to the machine settings is turned off in the
initial settings.
In order to use Telnet commands, set [Telnet] to
[Active], either on the webpage or on the machine control
panel.
Set Options Automatically
You can get the composition of options of the
connected machine and automatically set the
print driver.
Memo
 You cannot configure this when using Network Extension in
unsupported environments.
 For Windows PCL/PCL XPS drivers.
1
Launch the printer properties screen.
Reference
 "Launch the Utility"
 For Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008 R2/
Windows Server 2008, Telnet commands are inactive in
the initial settings.
In order to use Telnet commands, select [Start] >
[Control Panel] > [Programs] > [Programs and
Features] > [Turn Windows features on or off]. Set
[Telnet Client] to active in the displayed dialog box.
Memo
 For the next procedure, the following environment will be
used as an example. The details may differ depending on
the OS you are using.
- OS: Windows 7
2
Select the [Device Option] tab.
- IP Address: 192.168.0.2
3
Click on [Get Printer Settings].
- MAC Address: 00:80:87:84:9C:9B
4
Click [OK].
1
- 121 -
Click on [Start] and select [All
Programs]>[Accessories]>
[Command Prompt].
Windows Utilities
2
Following "(Driver Password): /Users/
Username>" enter "ping (Space)
machine IP Address".<Press the
Enter> key and check that access is
enabled.
E.g.: "C:/Users/WINDOWS > ping 192.168.0.2"
3
Following "telnet (Space)", enter the IP
address of the machine and press the
<Enter> key, in order to access the
machine through Telnet.
E.g.: "C:/Users/WINDOWS>telnet 192.168.0.2"
4
After "login:" enter "root" and press the
<Enter>.
5
If a prompt is displayed, enter your
password following "Password" and press
the <Enter> key.
Enter E.g: "password: 849C9B".
Memo
 The default "root" password is the last 6
alphanumerical digits of the machine's MAC address.
6
If a menu command is displayed, enter
the menu number you would like to
change, and press the <Enter> key.
7
Change the settings as required.
8
Save settings and log out of the
machine.
7
Useful Software
- 122 -
Mac OS X Utilities
 Mac OS X Utilities
This section explains utilities you can use in Mac OS X.
Panel Language Setup
Print Control Client
You can change the operating panel display
language.
1
This is client software for Print Control.
You can set the user name and user ID in the
print driver.
Output a menu map for the machine.
To output settings, press the <SETTINGS> key,
and select [Print Report]>[Menu Map].
2
Launch the panel language setup utility.
Registering a User ID
1
Reference
Launch the Print Control Client utility.
 "Installing Utilities" P. 102
3
Reference
 "Installing Utilities" P. 102
Select a method of connection.
When selecting [TCP/IP], enter an IP address.
You can check the IP address on the menu map
output using procedure 1.
4
Click [OK].
5
For the menu map "Language Format"
value, check that the value displayed on
the screen matches the following
conditions.
Condition 1: The version beginning digit is to
match.
Condition 2: The value displayed on the screen
should be the same as the Language
Format value or a newer (higher)
one.
Memo
2
Click [New].
3
Enter the Mac OS X login name, new
username, and new user ID, and click on
[Save].
4
Click on [Save].
5
Enter the password and click on [OK].
6
Quit Print Control Client.
Register Multiple Users at the Same
Time
You can use a CSV file to simultaneously register
multiple user IDs and usernames.
 If Condition 1 is not met, language settings cannot be
downloaded. If Condition 1 is not met, an error will be
displayed in the control panel when downloading. In
order to restore, restart the machine. If Condition 1 is
met but Condition 2 is not met, part of the setting
names will be displayed in English.
 For the following procedure, a text editor will be used for
the example.
1
Start the text editor.
6
Select a language.
2
7
Click on [Download].
Enter details in the order of login name,
user ID, and username, and separate
these with commas.
3
The file should be saved in a CSV format.
4
Launch the Print Control Client utility.
5
Select [Import] from the [File] menu.
The language setting file will be sent to the
machine, and when sending is complete, a
message will be displayed.
8
Restarts the machine.
Memo
- 123 -
Mac OS X Utilities
6
Select the CSV file created in procedure
3 and click [Open].
7
Click on [Save].
8
Enter the password and click on [OK].
9
Quit Print Control Client.
Network Card Setup
You can use the Network Card Setup to configure
the network.
Changing User ID and Username.
You can use this utility to change the username
and user ID.
1
Launch the Print Control Client utility.
In order to use Network Card Setup, TCP/IP
needs to be activated.
2
Select the user you want to change and
click on [Edit].
 Configure the TCP/IP settings.
3
Enter the new user ID and username and
click on [Save].
4
Click on [Save].
5
Enter the password and click on [OK].
6
Quit Print Control Client.
Note
 When using Mac OS X 10.6, Rosseta is required.
Configure the IP Address
1
Launch Network Card Setup.
Reference
 "Installing Utilities" P. 102
2
Select the machine.
You can use this utility to delete a username and
user ID.
3
Select [IP Address...] from the
[Printer] menu.
1
Launch the Print Control Client utility.
4
2
Select the user you want to delete and
click [Delete].
Configure the settings as required and
click [Save].
5
Enter the password and click on [OK].
3
Click on [Save].
4
Enter the password and click on [OK].
5
Quit Print Control Client.
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the Mac address.
- The password is case sensitive.
6
Click on [OK] to activate the new
settings.
Restart the machine network card.
Configure Web settings
You can launch the webpage, and configure the
machine network settings.
 Enabling Web Settings
1
Select [Web Page Settings...] from the
[Printer] menu.
2
Select [Enable] and click on [Set].
- 124 -
7
Useful Software
Deleting User IDs and Usernames
Mac OS X Utilities
3
Enter your password into [Enter
Password] and click on [OK].
- The default password is the last 6 alphanumerical
digits of the MAC MAC address.
- The password is case sensitive.
4
5
Select [Import] from [File], and select
[OKI MC351_361_561 Twain
Network].
6
When carrying out a network scan for the
first time, a dialog box informing you
that the connection selection tool is
being started will be displayed, so click
[OK].
7
Select the connection destination from
the [Scan Settings] dialog box, register
information as required and click on
[OK].
8
From [File] within Adobe Photoshop
CS3, select [Import] and select [OKI
MC351_361_561 Twain Network].
Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
 Opening a Webpage
1
Launch Network Card Setup.
2
Select the machine.
3
Select [View Printer Web Pages] from
the [Printer] menu .
The webpage will restart, and the machine status
page will be displayed.
A window is displayed.
Quit Network Card Setup
9
1
Select [Quit] from the [File] menu.
Reading will start.
10 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
Network Scanner Setup Tool
[Photoshop].
When carrying out a scan through the network
for the first time with Mac OS X, launch the
network scanner setup tool to set the connection
target.
It is not necessary to set the connection target
after the first time.
Memo
 For the following procedure, Adobe Photoshop CS3 will be
used as an example. The details may differ depending on
the application you are using.
 The Network Scanner Setup Tool is installed at the same
time as the scanner driver.
 The Network Scanner Setup Tool can be launched from
[Network Scanner Setup Tool] within [Applications]>
[OKIDATA]>[Scanner].
Carry out a network scan for the
first time.
1
Press the <Scan> button on the control
panel.
2
The original can be set by an automatic
document feeder or the document glass.
3
Press
OK
4
Click the scan button .
, select [Remote PC], and press
.
Launch Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
- 125 -
8. Adjusting Color
This chapter explains various color adjustment methods.
Memo
 In this chapter, Notepad will be used as an example of Windows, and TextEdit will be used as an example for Mac OS X The
operation may differ with the application or the version of the printer driver you are using.
 Adjusting Color on the Control Panel
This section explains the method of adjusting the color using the control panel.
Memo
 The following explanations are for when [Continue Scan] is disable. [For the basic procedures when [Continue Scan] is
enabled, refer to the User’s Manual Basic.
 [In order to access the [Admin Setup] menu, the administrator password is required. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Adjusting Color Registration
Adjusting the Density
The machine automatically adjusts the color
registration when it is turned on, the top cover is
opened or closed, and every time 400 pages are
printed continuously.
You can also adjust the color registration
manually if you are not satisfied with the quality
of the color on the printouts.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
The machine automatically adjusts the density
when the image drum cartridge is changed and
every time 500 pages are printed continuously.
You can also adjust the density manually if you
are not satisfied with the density of the printouts.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
then press
to select [Admin Setup] and
then press
OK
to select [Admin Setup] and
.
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter], and then press
4
Select [Enter], and then press
5
Press
5
Press
Press
.
OK
.
8
Press
or
.
10 Press
9
OK
OK
.
to select [Adjust Density] and
OK
.
Make sure that [Execute] is selected
Press
or
OK
.
and select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen, and press
and select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen, and press
.
and then press
Make sure that [Execute] is selected
OK
Press
OK
to select [Color Menu] and
then press
to select [Adjust Registration]
and then press
9
7
OK
Press
then press
.
and then press
8
6
10 Press
.
until the top screen is displayed.
- 126 -
8
to select [Print Setup] and
then press
to select [Color Menu] and
then press
7
OK
.
OK
.
until the top screen is displayed.
Adjusting Color
Press
.
to select [Print Setup] and
then press
6
OK
OK
Adjusting Color on the Control Panel
6
Fine Adjustment of Color
Registration
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
OK
Select [Enter], and then press
5
Press
Press
7
8
or
Press
or
and select [Yes] on the
.
.
OK
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
to select [Admin Setup] and
then press
OK
.
, select the value you want
.
.
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter], and then press
5
Press
Press
Press
OK
.
OK
.
to select the color part you want
to tune and then press
Adjusting the Color Balance
(Density)
8
9
Printing Color Swatch
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
to select [Admin Setup] and
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter], and then press
5
Press
OK
.
to select [Print Setup] and
then press
OK
or
.
- 127 -
Press
OK
.
, select the value you want
and then press
You can adjust the density of each color. You can
select a light, medium, or dark density for each
color.
1
Press
.
to select [Color Menu] and
then press
7
OK
to select [Print Setup] and
then press
6
 To adjust a color in the direction of the paper feed, select a
value within [+1] to [+3]. To adjust a color in the opposite
direction of the paper feed, select a value within [-1] to [-3].
OK
3
Memo
OK
.
Adjusting the Color
until the top screen is displayed.
then press
OK
 On the color tuning pattern, 44 squares are printed. The
present setting of the light, medium, and dark colors are
indicated with dashed lines. You can check the color to be
tuned.
to select [Color Menu] and
OK
Press
.
.
and then press
9
OK
Press , [CYAN Reg Fine Adj],
[MAGENTA Reg Fine Adj], or
[YELLOW Reg Fine Adj], and then
Press
8
OK
A color swatch is printed.
to select [Print Setup] and
then press
to select [Color Tuning/Print
Memo
4
OK
.
Pattern], and then press
.
Enter the administrator password.
then press
Press
OK
confirmation screen, and press
3
6
7
to select [Admin Setup] and
then press
to select [Color Menu] and
then press
You can precisely adjust the registration of each
color if you are not satisfied with the results of
auto color registration.
1
Press
OK
.
until the top screen is displayed.
Color Adjustment for Copying and Scanning
 Color Adjustment for Copying and Scanning
This section explains methods to adjust colors when copying and scanning. You can adjust the contrast
and hue for copying and scanning documents. In the following procedure, the settings on the copying
menu are explained as an example. You can adjust the same settings on the scan menu.
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting RGB Color
1
Press the <Copy> key.
1
Press the <Copy> key.
2
Press
menu.
to enter the [Change Settings]
2
Press
menu.
to enter the [Change Settings]
3
Press
to select [Image Settings] and
3
Press
to select [Image Settings] and
then press
4
Press
press
5
Press
OK
.
then press
to select [Contrast] and then
OK
4
.
OK
or
, select the value you want
and then press
OK
Press the <Copy> key.
2
Press
menu.
to enter the [Change Settings]
3
Press
to select [Image Settings] and
4
Press
5
Press
or , select the value you want
and then press
to set another color.
6
Repeat step 5 until you finish the setting
.
or
, select the value you want
and then press
OK
.
Adjusting Saturation
1
Press the <Copy> key.
2
Press
menu.
to enter the [Change Settings]
3
Press
to select [Image Settings] and
then press
4
Press
Press
OK
.
to select [Saturation] and
then press
5
OK
.
8
to select [Hue] and then press
.
Press
.
or
OK
.
, select the value you want
and then press
OK
.
- 128 -
Adjusting Color
OK
to select [RGB] and then press
for all colors, and then press
1
OK
.
5
.
Adjusting the Hue
then press
Press
OK
Color Adjustment for Printing
 Color Adjustment for Printing
This section explains how to adjust color for printing. You can adjust the color using a printer driver to
print out satisfying document.
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
About ColorMatching
Color Matching means managing and adjusting
documents color to keep it consistent between
input and output devices.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print] .
There are two color matching functions [Office
Color] and [Graphic Pro] (If you use a PCL XPS
driver you can use the [Color (User Settings)]
color matching function. f you use Mac OS X, you
can also use[ColorSync] function to do color
matching.
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
4
Select [Office Color] or [Automatic]
and then click [Print].
Color Matching (Office Color)
If you use business documents mainly, the Office
Color is suitable. It manages and adjusts RGB
colors to CMYK colors.
Note
 This function can support only RGB color data.
 If you want to manage CMYK color data, use Graphic Pro
function.
If you are Using a Windows PCL/PS
Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select [Color] tab and select [Office
Color], and then click [OK].
Memo
 If the printer options are not displayed in the [Print] dialog
on the Mac OS X 10.5 or later, click the triangular button
at the side of the [Printer] menu.
Black Finish
You can change the black finish when printing in
color. The black finish setting can be used when
the printing mode of the printer driver [Office
Color] or [Graphic Pro] is selected.
There are two types of black finish, the
composite black (made from CMYK toner) and
the true black (made from black toner only).
For the composite black, the cyan, magenta,
yellow and black toners are combined. This is
suitable for printing photographs. The composite
black sometimes appears dark brown.
For the true black, only black toner is used to
print true black. It is suitable to print black text
or graphics.
If you are Using a Windows PCL XPS
Printer Driver
If you use the [Office Color] function, you can
also select the auto. For the auto, the suitable
method is selected automatically to print out the
document. If Automatic is selected the
appropriate method will be set when printing.
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
1
Open the file you want to print.
3
Click on [Preferences].
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
4
Select [Color] tab and select [Advanced
Color], and then click [OK].
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select [Color] tab and select [Office
Color] or [Graphic Pro] and then click
[Details].
5
Select the method to create black from
[Black Finish].
- 129 -
Color Adjustment for Printing
6
Click [OK] to close the Details window.
7
Click on [OK].
5
Click on [OK].
Memo
If you are Using a Windows PCL XPS
Printer Driver
 You can also set grayscale on the [Setup] tab if you are
using PCL/PCL XPS printer driver. If you use PS printer
driver you can set this on the[Job Options] tab.
For Mac OS X
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
1
Open the file you want to print.
3
Click on [Preferences].
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print] .
4
Select the [Color] tab.
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
5
Select the [Advanced Color], then
select a method to create black from
[Black Finish].
4
Select [Grayscale Print].
5
Click on [Print].
6
Overprinting Black
(Overprinting black)
Click on [OK].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
When there is white gap between black letters
and the colored background, you can set black to
overprint to cover the gap.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print] .
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
4
Select [Office Color] or [Graphic Pro]
and then click [Details].
 If the toner layer is thick, the toner may not be fixed
5
Select the method to create black from
[Black Finish].
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Drivers
6
Click on [OK].
Note
 This function cannot be used with some applications.

This function can be used when printing only text over a
background color.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select the [Job Options] tab and select
[Advanced].
You can print a color document in grayscale
without any settings on the data.
5
Select the [Overprint Black] checkbox.
For Windows
For Windows PS Drivers
8
Memo
Printing in Grayscale
1
Open the file you want to print.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select the [Color] tab and select[Gray
Scale].
4
Select the [Color] tab and select
[Advanced].
5
Select the [Black Overprint] checkbox.
- 130 -
Adjusting Color
 If the printer options are not displayed in the [Print] dialog
on the Mac OS X 10.5 or later, click the triangular button
at the side of the [Printer] menu.
Color Adjustment for Printing
For Mac OS X Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
4
Select [Advanced]and then select
[Black Overprint] checkbox.
5
Click [Details] to select [Printer
Simulation].
6
Select an ink feature you want to
simulate from [Simulation Target
Profile].
Color Separation Printing
You can use color separation printing function
without any application.
Simulating Printing Results in
Ink
You can simulate the output of a printing press
by adjusting the CMYK color data, for offset
printing etc.
Note
 Windows PCL/PCL XPS printer driver cannot be used for
this function.
 If you are using Adobe Illustrator, use the color separation
function of the application. Turn off the color matching
function of the printer driver.
For Windows PS Drivers
Note
 Windows PCL XPS printer driver cannot be used for this
function.
 Mac OS X printer driver may not be available depending
applications.
1
Open the file you want to print.
 This function can be used when the [Office Color] or
[Graphic Pro] is selected for [Color Mode].
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select the [Color] tab and select
[Advanced].
5
Select the color you want from [Print
Color Separations] and then click
[OK].
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select the [Color] tab and select
[Graphic Pro], and then click [Details].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
For the PS driver you can do a printer simulation
with [Office Color], for business or other
documents, then click [Advanced], and select the
properties of the ink you want to simulate from
[CMYK Simulation].
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
5
Select the [Printer Simulation].
4
Select [Advanced].
6
Select an ink feature you want to
simulate from [Simulation Target
Profile] on [Input Profile] (in the case
of a PS printer driver this is [Input]) and
click [OK].
5
Select the color you want from [Print
Color Separations] and then click
[OK].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
4
Select [Graphic Pro].
- 131 -
Color Adjustment for Printing
Using ColorSync (Mac OS X
Only)
You can use the ColorSync function. This function
is the color matching program used only for
Macintosh.
Note
 Use an applications that supports ColorSync.
 Be sure that the calibration and ICC profile setting of
monitor are completed.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print] .
3
Select [Color Matching] from the panel
menu.
4
Select [ColorSync].
5
Select [OKI MC561 1200dpi (PS)],
[OKI MC561 600 Multi (PS)] or [OKI
MC561 600dpi (PS)] from [Profile].
6
Click on [Print].
Memo
 If you use other version than Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6,
select [Standard] for [Color Changing] on the
[ColorSync] panel.
 If the printer options are not displayed in the [Print] dialog
on the Mac OS X 10.5 or later, click the triangular button
at the side of the [Printer] menu.
8
Adjusting Color
- 132 -
Profile Assistant
 Profile Assistant
You can adjust the color using an ICC profile with the machine. ICC profile is used generally to manage
colors. Before using this function, you need to register the ICC profile of the input device such as a
monitor, scanner, and digital camera. To register the ICC profile, you can use the Profile Assistant utility.
Note
 If your input or output device does not have any profile, ask the manufacturer or the store of the device.
Reference
 For details on how to install the Profile Assistant, refer to "Installing Utilities" P. 102.
For Mac OS X
Registering ICC Profile
1
For Windows
2
1
Click on [Start], and select [All
Programs]>[Okidata]>[Profile
Assistant]>[Profile Assistant].
2
Select [USB Port] or [TCP/IP
Network] and then click [Start].
3
Note
Select the machine from the list and click
on [OK].
4
Click on [Add].
5
Select a profile you want to register and
then click[Register].
8
4
Click [Add] on the main window.
5
Select a profile you want to register and
then click [Choose].
Memo
 If click the ICC profile you want, information
(description, size, date color space etc.) is displayed
on the list.
Select the type of the profile you want to
register from [Profile Type].
 ICC profile is usually stored in the following folder.
[Library]>[ColorSync]>[Profiles].
If you cannot find the ICC profile, ask the
manufacturer of the device.
Select a number you want to register for
the profile.
The registered numbers are displayed in blue
buttons. If you select these numbers, the profile is
overwritten.
6
Select the type of profile you want to
register.
Enter comments in [Comment] field, if
necessary.
7
Select a number you want to register for
the profile.
The registered numbers are displayed in bold and
underline. If you select these numbers, the profile
is overwritten.
The comments can be seen on the profile lists or
the report of color profile list.
9
Select the device you want to register
and then click [Choose].
 USB2.0 is not supported. If you use this utility with
connecting to USB, set the USB Speed to 12Mbps for
connecting with USB1.1.
3
7
Select [Network] or [USB] tab.
If you connects the machine with USB, select
[USB]. If you connect the machine on network,
select [Network].
If you connect the machine with USB, select
[USB]. If you connect the machine on network,
select [TCP/IP].
6
Launch Profile Assistant.
Click on [OK].
8
10 Check that the registered profile is
displayed on the list of the main window
and then click [Finish].
Enter comments in [Comment] field, if
necessary.
The comments can be seen on the profile lists or
the report of color profile list.
9
- 133 -
Click on [Add].
Profile Assistant
10 Check that the registered profile is
displayed on the list of the main window
and then click [Close] on [File].
Memo
 The registered profile can be used for color matching on
[Graphic Pro] function.
 The next time you launch the Profile Assistant utility, steps
2 and 3 will be skipped and the utility will connect to the
machine you used last time. If you change the connecting
printer, select [Change Printer...] in Step 4.
Reference
 For details on how to do a color matching using the ICC
profile, refer to "Color Matching Using ICC Profile (Graphic
Pro)".
 For how to print out the color profile list, please refer to
"Printing Reports" P. 73
Color Matching Using ICC
Profile (Graphic Pro)
You can adjust and manage color using an ICC
profile. You can do color matching or specify a
simulation printing. Before using this function,
register ICC profiles of input/output devices.
Note
 If you are using a Windows PCL printer driver, [CMYK
Link Profile]cannot be specified.
 The Windows PCL XPS printer driver cannot be used.
 If you installed ICC profile on Windows PS printer driver,
click [Options] to select [ICM no effect] on the [Layout]
tab.
For Windows
8
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select the [Color] tab and select
[Graphic Pro] and then click [Details]
5
Change settings as required and click on
[OK].
Adjusting Color
1
For Mac OS X
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Color] from the panel menu.
4
Select [Graphic Pro] on the [Color]
panel.
5
Change settings as required and click on
[OK].
- 134 -
Color Correct Utility
 Color Correct Utility
This section explains color utility correction. You can specify the colors on the palette selected in
Microsoft Excel software etc. with the Color Correct Utility.
Note
 Apply settings for each printer driver.
 You must be logged on as an administrator to do color matching using the color correct utility.
 The test printing and sample printing cannot be used when the <SETTING> key >[Admin Setup]>[Management]>
[Encryption Setup]>[Job Limitation] is set.
Reference
 For details on how to install the color correct utility, refer to "Installing Utilities" P. 102.
10 Check the printed color sample to select
Changing Palette Color
the most suitable color you want within
the adjustable range and then check the
X and Y values.
For Windows
11 Select the values you checked at step 10,
and then click [OK].
12 Click [Print Palette]and check if the
adjusted color is closer to the color you
want and then click [Next].
If you want to change the color more or change
other colors, repeat steps 8 to 11.
13 Enter a save name and then click[Save].
1
Click [Start] and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Color Correct Utility]>
[Color Correct Utility].
2
Select [Office Palette Tuning] and
then click [Next].
3
Select the machine and click [Next].
4
Select the name the setting you want
and then click [Print Sample].
A dialog box appears.
14 Click on [OK].
15 Click on [Finish].
For Mac OS X
The color sample is printed.
5
Click on [Next].
6
Click on [Print Palette].
7
The adjusting color sample is printed.
1
Launch Color Correct utility.
Compare the color between the color
palette on the screen and printed
adjusting color sample.
2
Select the machine and then click
[Select PPD File].
3
Select the PPD file on the machine, and
click [Open].
4
Click on [Next].
5
Click on [Office Palette Tuning].
The color marked with cross cannot be adjusted.
8
Click the color you want to adjust.
9
Check each adjustable range in the
pulldown menu for X and Y.
The adjustable value varies depending on the
color.
- 135 -
Color Correct Utility
6
Select the name the setting you want
and then click [Print Swatches].
Changing Gamma Value or Hue
A color swatch is printed.
7
Click on [Next].
8
Click on [Print Palette].
You can adjust tone by adjusting the gamma
value and output color by adjusting the hue.
For Windows
The adjusting color sample is printed.
9
Compare the color between the color
palette on the screen and printed
adjusting color sample.
1
Click [Start] and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Color Correct Utility]>
[Color Correct Utility].
The color marked with cross cannot be adjusted.
2
Select [Hue & Saturation Tuning.] and
then click [Next].
3
Select the machine and click [Next].
4
Select the standard mode and click
[Next].
5
Apply settings as necessary by adjusting
the slide bar.
10 Click the color you want to adjust.
11 Check each adjustable range from the
pull-down menu for X and Y.
The adjustable value varies depending on the
color.
12 Check the printed color sample to select
the most suitable color you want within
the adjustable range and then check the
X and Y values.
13 Select the values you checked at step12,
and then click [OK].
If you select the [Use printerís unadjusted
color] check box, 100 percent of each color is
used for printing, and the slide bar of hue is fixed.
6
Click on [Test Print].
7
Check the print result.
14 Click [Print Palette] and check that the
adjusted color is closer to the color you
want.
If you want to change the color more or change
other colors, repeat steps 10 to 14.
If you are not satisfied with the result, repeat
steps 5 to 6.
8
Click on [Next].
9
Enter a name and then click [Save].
A dialog box appears.
15 Enter a name and then click [Save].
10 Click on [OK].
16 To save the setting on the PPD file
11 Click on [Finish].
Enter the administratorís name and password.
17 Click on [Quit].
For Mac OS X
18 On the confirmation screen, click on
1
Launch Color Correct utility.
2
Select the machine and then click
[Select PPD File]to select a file.
3
Select the PPD file on the machine, and
click [Open].
4
Click on [Next].
5
Click [Gamma/Hue/Saturation
Tuning].
6
Select the standard mode and click
[Next].
[OK].
Preferences] to delete and reregister all
printers for which adjustments were
made.
- 136 -
Adjusting Color
selected at step 2, click [Save].
19 Select [Print & Fax] from [System
8
Color Correct Utility
7
Apply settings as necessary by adjusting
the slide bar.
5
[If you select the [Use default printer hue]
check box, 100 percent of each color is used for
printing, and the slide bar of hue is fixed.
Select the [User Defined] from [Color
Setting], select the setting you created
with the Color Correct utility and then
click [OK].
8
Click on [Print Test].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
9
Check the print result.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Click [Office Color] on the [Color]
panel.
4
Click [Options] to select the setting you
created with the Color Correct Utility
from [Color Correct settings] and then
click [OK].
If you are not satisfied with the result, repeat
steps 7 to 9.
10 Enter a name and then click [Save].
11 To save the setting on the PPD file
selected at step 2, click [Save].
Enter the administrators name and password.
12 Click on [Quit].
13 On the confirmation screen, click on
Saving Color Correction
Settings
[OK].
14 Select [Print & Fax] from [System
Preferences] to delete and reregister all
printers for which adjustments were
made.
You can save the adjusted color settings to a file.
Note
 The administrator's authority is needed for this function.
Printing in Adjusted Color
Settings
For Windows
For Windows PCL/PS Printer Driver
1
Click [Start] and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Color Correct Utility]>
[Color Correct Utility].
2
Select [Import/Export Color
Settings.] and then click [Next].
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
3
Select the machine and click [Next].
4
Select the [Color] tab and select [Office
Color] and then click [Detail]
4
Click on [Export].
Select the [User Setting] ([User
Settings] for PS) and select the setting
you created with the Color Correct Utility
and then click [OK].
5
5
Select the settings to export and click
[Export].
6
Specify the folder to be saved and then
click [Save].
7
Click on [OK].
8
Click on [Finish].
If you are Using a Windows PCL XPS
Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select the [Color] tab and select
[Advanced Color].
- 137 -
Color Correct Utility
For Mac OS X
For Mac OS X
1
Launch Color Correct utility.
1
Launch Color Correct utility.
2
Select the machine and then click
[Select PPD File] to select a file.
2
Select the machine and then click
[Select PPD File] to select a file.
3
Select the PPD file on the machine, and
click [Open].
3
Select the PPD file on the machine, and
click [Open].
4
Click on [Next].
4
Click on [Next].
5
Click [Manage Color Settings].
5
Click [Manage Color Settings].
6
Click on [Export].
6
Click [Import].
7
Select the settings to export and click
[Export].
7
Select the file and click on [Open].
8
Select the import settings and click on
[Import].
9
To save the setting to the PPD file
selected at step 2, click [Save].
8
Specify the folder name to be saved to
and then click [Save].
9
Click on [Cancel].
10 Click on [Quit].
10 Enter a user name and password with
administrator rights and click [OK].
11 On the confirmation screen, click on
11 Click on [Cancel].
[OK].
12 Check the setting is imported properly
Importing Color Correction
Settings
and then quit the Color Correct Utility.
Deleting Color Correction
Settings
You can import color correct settings from files.
For Windows
1
Select [Import/Export Color
Settings.] and then click [Next].
3
Select the machine, and click [Next].
4
Click [Import].
5
Select the file and click on [Open].
6
Select the import settings and click on
[Import].
Check that the setting is imported
properly and then click [Finish].
8
For Windows
1
Click [Start] and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Color Correct Utility]>
[Color Correct Utility].
2
Select [Import/Export Color
Settings.] and then click [Next].
3
Select the machine, and click [Next].
4
Select the file you want to delete and
click [Delete].
A dialog box appears.
5
On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
6
Check that the setting is deleted properly
and then click [Finish].
- 138 -
Adjusting Color
Click [Start] and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Color Correct Utility]>
[Color Correct Utility].
2
7
You can delete unnecessary setting files.
Color Correct Utility
For Mac OS X
1
Launch Color Correct utility.
2
Select the machine and then click
[Select PPD File]to select a file.
3
Select the PPD file on the machine, and
click [Open].
4
Click on [Next].
5
Click [Manage Color Settings].
6
Select the setting you want to delete and
click [Delete].
A dialog box appears.
7
On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
8
To save the setting to the PPD file
selected at step 2, click [Save].
9
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
10 Check that the setting is deleted properly
and then click [Quit].
11 On the confirmation screen, click on
[OK].
- 139 -
Color Swatch Utility
 Color Swatch Utility
This section explains the Color Swatch Utility. You can print an RGB color sample with the machine using
the Color Swatch Utility. You can check the RGB values with the RGB color sample so you can print out
the color as you want.
Note
 This utility cannot be used on Mac OS X .
Reference
 For details on how to install the utility, refer to "Installing Utilities" P. 102.
Printing Color Swatch
1
Click on [Start], and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Color Swatch Utility]>
[Color Swatch Utility].
Click [Print].
3
Select the machine from [Name].
4
Click [Close].
5
Click [Print].
6
Select the machine from [Name].
7
Click on [OK].
8
Check the color is adjusted as you want.
Memo
 If you are not satisfied with the printing result, repeat
from step 1 to 8.
Click on [OK].
A color swatch is printed.
5
Check the color sample to select the
color you want and then write down the
RGB values.
Customizing the Color Sample
If you cannot find the color you want on "Printing
Color Swatch" step 5, follow the procedures
below to customize the color.
Printing a File With the Color
You Want
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select the text or graphic to adjust the
RGB values on an application.
3
Print out the file.
Memo
1
Click on [Switch].
2
Click on [Detail].
3
Adjust the three slide bars until the color
you want appears.
 For details on how to specify the color on the application,
read your applications manual.
 When printing color samples and the file you want, use the
same printer driver setting values.
- 140 -
8
Adjusting Color
2
4
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility
 PS Gamma Adjuster Utility
This section explains the PS Gamma Adjuster Utility. You can adjust the half-tone density of CMYK colors
printed by the machine. Use this function if the color in a photograph or graphic is too deep.
Note
 The Windows PCL XPS printer driver cannot be used.
 Printing speed may be slow if this function is used. If you want to prioritize the speed, select [Not Specified] from [Half-tone
adjustment].
 Some applications can specify the half-tone settings. If you use these functions, select [Not Specified] from [Half-Tone].
 If you are using Windows, [Half-tone adjustment] menu or the contents may not be displayed on the [Color] tab. In this
case, restart your computer.
 If you are using an application before registering the half-tone adjustment name, restart the application before printing.
 [The registered half-tone adjustment name is effective for all printers of the same type if the multiple printers are saved in the
[Printers and FAX] folder.
Reference
 For details on how to install the PS Gamma Adjuster utility, refer to "Installing Utilities" P. 102.
9
Registering Halftone
For Windows PS Drivers
1
Select the machine from [Select
Printer].
3
Click on [New].
4
Adjust the half-tone.
You can select a method to adjust the half-tone
from operating the graph line, entering the
gamma value, or entering the density value into
the text box.
5
Enter setting name in [Gamma Curve
Name] and then click [OK].
6
Click on [Add].
7
Click on [Apply].
A dialog box appears.
8
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
Click [Start] and select [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[PS Gamma Adjuster]>
[PS Gamma Adjuster].
2
Click on [OK].
Click on [Exit] to quit the PS Halftone
Adjuster utility.
1
Launch the PS Gamma Adjuster utility.
2
Click on [New].
3
Adjust the half-tone.
You can select a method to adjust the half-tone
from operating the graph line, entering the
gamma value, or entering the density value into
the text box.
4
Enter setting name in [Gamma Curve
Name] and then click [Save].
5
Click on [Select PPD].
6
Select the PPD file to register the
halftone adjustment and click[Open].
7
Select the gamma curves created and
click [Add].
8
Click on [Save].
9
Enter the administratorís name and
password and click [OK].
10 Exit the PS Gamma Adjuster.
- 141 -
PS Gamma Adjuster Utility
11 Select [Print & Fax] from [System
Preferences] to delete and reregister all
printers for which adjustments were
made.
Printing a File With the
Adjusted Gamma Curve
For Windows PS Drivers
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
3
Click on [Preferences].
4
Select the [Color] tab, select the halftone adjustment setting from [Custom
Calibration]], and then click [OK].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
4
Select the half-tone adjustment setting
from Halftone Adjustment on [Job
Options] on the [Custom gamma]
panel.
8
Adjusting Color
- 142 -
9. Network Settings
This chapter explains network settings for your machine.
 Network Setting Items
This section explains the items that can be set with network functions.
You can print the network setting list and check the current network settings by pressing the
<SETTING> key and selecting [Reports] > [System] >[Network Information] on the control panel.
Reference
 For details on how to print the network settings list, refer to "Printing Reports" P. 73.
You can change the network settings from your machine's web page, Configuration Tool, TELNET, and
Network Card Setup. For the menus available for each utility, refer to the following tables.
 Device Information
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Contact to
Administrat
or
Contact to
Admin
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the contact information of the
system administrator up to 225
characters.
Device
Name
Device
Name
-
-
-
OKI-(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)
Sets the machine name up to 31
characters.
Short
Device
Name
Short
Device
Name
-
-
-
(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)
Sets the short machine name up to 15
characters.
Machine
Location
Location
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets the machine location up to 255
characters.
Asset
Number
Asset
Number
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets the arbitrary number to manage
your machine up to 32 characters.
 TCP/IP
Item
Web
page
IP Address
Set
TELNET
IP Address
Set
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
IP Address
Request
Method
IP Address
Request
Method
Factory
Default
Setting
Get IP
address
Automatic
Description
Specifies the method of assigning an IP
address.
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets an IP address.
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
Subnet
Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets a subnet mask.
- 143 -
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Gateway
Address
Gateway
Address
Default
Gateway
Address
DNS Server
(Primary)
DNS Server
(Pri.)
-
-
DNS Server DNS Server
(Secondary) (Sec.)
-
Dynamic
DNS
Dynamic
DNS
Domain
Name
Domain
Name
Default
Gateway
Address
Default
Gateway
Address
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
0.0.0.0
Sets a gateway address.
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Be sure to specify this item when you
use a domain name to specify the
SMTP/POP/LDAP server.
-
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
Be sure to specify this item when you
use a domain name to specify the
SMTP/POP/LDAP server.
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to register the
information to the DNS server when a
setting has been changed.
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets the domain name the machine
belongs to.
WINS Server WINS
(Primary)
Server (Pri.)
-
-
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the name or IP address of the
WINS server (for Windows only).
WINS
WINS
Server
Server
(Secondary) (Sec.)
-
-
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the name or IP address of the
WINS server (for Windows only).
Scope ID
Scope ID
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the Scope ID for WINS. From
1 to 223 characters can be used.
Windows
Windows
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use the autodiscovery function of Windows.
Macintosh
Macintosh
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use the autodiscovery function of Macintosh.
Device
Name
Printer
Name
-
-
-
OKI-(machine
name)-(last six
digits of MAC
address)
Specifies the rule for displaying the
machine name when the auto-detect
function is enabled.
IPv6
IP Version
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use IPv6.
9
 NetWare
Web
page
Print Mode
Connection
method
TELNET
NetWare
Mode
Communication TCP or IPX
protocol
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
-
-
-
Print Server
Specifies how to use the machine, as
a print server, or as a remote printer.
-
-
-
NDS+Bindery
Specifies the NetWare priority mode.
-
-
-
IPX
Select IPX or TCP/IP to be used on
NetWare.
- 144 -
Network Settings
Item
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Print Server
Name
Print Server
Name
-
-
-
OKI-(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)PS
Specifies the print server name up to
31 characters. This value must be
identical to the one specified in the file
server.
Printer Name
Printer
Name
-
-
-
OKI-(machine
name)-(last
six digits of
MAC address)PR
Specifies the machine name when you
use a remote printer. This value must
be identical to the one specified in the
file server.
Frame Type
Frame Type
-
-
-
Auto
Specifies the frame type the machine
uses on NetWare.
-
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use the bindery
mode.
When you access NetWare 3.12 or the
bindery network of NetWare 6.0, 5.0,
or 4.1, enable the bindery mode.
When you access NDS of NetWare 6.0,
5.0, or 4.1, disable the bindery mode.
File Server
Name
File Server
Name #1-8
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the name of the file server
up to 47 characters. You can specify
up to 8 servers.
Password for
File Servers
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a password to log in to the file
server up to 31 characters.
You must specify this item when you
set a password on the file server for
your machine.
Job Polling
Interval
Job Polling
Time (sec.)
-
-
-
4 (seconds)
Sets the interval to access the print
job queue.
Tree
NDS Tree
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the NDS tree name up to 31
characters. Specify the tree name to
which the file server belongs.
Context
NDS
Context
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the NDS context name up to
77 characters. Specify the context
name to which the print server
belongs.
Job Timeout
Job Timeout
(sec.)
-
-
-
10 (seconds)
Specifies the time until a port is freed
after the last print job was accepted.
Print Server
Names
Print Sever
Name #1-8
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the name of the print server
to access up to 47 characters. You can
specify up to 8 servers.
Bindery Mode
 EtherTalk
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
EtherTalk
Zone Name
Zone Name
-
-
-
*
Specifies the EtherTalk zone name up to
32 characters.
Printer
Name
Printer
Name
-
-
-
(machine
name)
Specifies the EtherTalk printer name up
to 31 characters.
- 145 -
Network Setting Items
 NBT/NetBEUI
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Short
Device
Name
Short
Device
Name
-
-
-
(machine
name)-
(last six digits
of MAC
address)
Sets the name to be identified on
NetBIOS over TCP/NetBEUI up to 15
characters.
In Windows it is displayed in the
PrintServer group of the Network
Computer.
Workgroup
Name
Workgroup
Name
-
-
-
PrintServer
Sets the work group name to be
displayed on Windows network
computers up to 15 characters.
Master
Browser
Setting
Master
Browser
Setting
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use master
browser.
Comment
Comment
-
-
-
EthernetBoard Sets a comment up to 48 characters.
OkiLAN 8500e It is displayed when Windows Explorer is
in the detailed view.
 E-mail Send Settings
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
SMTP Send
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use SMTP (E-mail).
SMTP
Server
SMTP
Server
Name
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the SMTP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address.
Be sure to configure DNS settings if you
enter a domain name.
Device
E-mail
Address
Device
Email
Address
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the e-mail address of the
machine.
Authenticati
on Method
SMTP-Auth
Method
-
-
-
None
Specifies whether to perform SMTP
authentication.
SMTP Port
Number
SMTP Port
Number
-
-
-
25
Specifies the SMTP port number.
SMTP User
ID
SMTP
Server User
ID
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a user ID for SMTP authentication.
SMTP
Password
SMTP
Server
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a password for SMTP
authentication.
SMTP
Encryption
Scheme
SMTP
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
None
Specifies the method to encrypt the
SMTP (E-mail) send protocol.
-
POP Server
Name
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the POP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address. Be sure
to configure DNS settings if you enter a
domain name.
-
POP Port
Number
-
-
-
110
Specifies the port number to access the
POP server.
- 146 -
9
Network Settings
SMTP Send
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
POP User ID POP Server
UserID
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a user ID to access the POP server.
POP
Password
POP Server
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a password to access the POP
server.
POP
Encryption
Scheme
POP
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
None
Specifies the method to encrypt POP
communication.
APOP
Support
Use APOP
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use APOP.
Attached
Information
Device
Model
Attached
Info Device
Model
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to list the machine
model name on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Network
Interface
Attached
Info
Network
Interface
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to list the network
interface name on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Serial
Number
Attached
Info Serial
Number
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to list the machine
serial number on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Asset
Number
Attached
Info Asset
Number
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to list the machine
asset number on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Device
Name
Attached
Info Device
Name
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to list the device
name of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Location
Attached
Info
Location
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to list the machine
location on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
IP Address
Attached
Info IP
Address
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to list the IP address
of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
MAC
Address
Attached
Info MAC
Address
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to list the MAC
address of the machine on an alert
e-mail.
Attached
Information
Short
Device
Name
Attached
Info Short
Device
Name
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to list the short device
name of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Attached
Information
Device URL
Attached
Info Device
URL
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to list the web page
URL of the machine on an alert e-mail.
Comment
Comment
Line 1-4
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a comment to add to an alert
e-mail. You can enter up to 63
characters in a line. A maximum of 4
lines can be specified.
Reply-To
E-mail
Address
Reply-To
Address
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the e-mail address used to
reply to e-mails. Specify the e-mail
address of the network administrator.
- 147 -
Network Setting Items
 E-mail Receive Settings
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Use Protocol POP or
SMTP
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use the e-mail
receive function. Select the protocol to
use.
POP Server
Name
POP Server
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the POP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address. Be sure
to configure DNS settings if you enter a
domain name.
POP User ID POP Server
UserID
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a user ID to access the POP server.
POP
Password
POP Server
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a password to access the POP
server.
APOP
Support
Use APOP
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use APOP.
POP Port
Number
POP Port
Number
-
-
-
110
Specifies the port number to access the
POP server.
POP
Encryption
Scheme
POP
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
None
Specifies the method to encrypt POP
communication.
POP Receive
Interval
Mail Polling
Time (min)
-
-
-
5 (minutes)
Specifies the interval to access the POP
server to receive e-mails.
Domain
Filter
Domain
filter
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use domain
filtering.
E-mail from
the domains
specified
below.
Filter Policy
-
-
-
Accept
Specifies whether to accept or block
e-mail from the specified domains.
Domain 1-5
Domain 1-5
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the domain to apply domain
filtering.
SMTP
Receive Port
Number
Port Number
-
-
-
25
Specifies the port number to access the
machine via SMTP.
9
 E-mail Alert Settings
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Address 1-5
Email
Address 1-5
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the destination e-mail address.
You can specify up to 5 destinations.
Error
Notification
Method
Notify Mode
1-5
-
-
-
Notification
upon
occurrence of
an error
Specifies when to notify you of an error.
E-mail
Notification
Interval
Email Alert
Interval
(Hours) 1-5
-
-
-
24 (Hours)
Specifies the interval of the e-mail alert.
Effective only when periodic notification
is specified.
- 148 -
Network Settings
Item
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Consumable Consumable
Warning
Warning
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Immediate
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding consumables.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Consumable Consumable
Warning
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding consumables.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Consumable Consumable
Error
Error EVENT
1-5
-
-
-
Immediate
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding consumables. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Consumable Consumable
Error
Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding consumables. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Maintenance Maintenance
Unit
Unit
Warning
Warning
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
2H0M
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Maintenance Maintenance
Unit
Unit
Warning
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Maintenance Maintenance
Unit Error
Unit Error
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Immediate
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Maintenance Maintenance
Unit Error
Unit Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the maintenance unit.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Paper
Supply
Warning
Paper
Supply
Warning
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
0H15M
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper. Effective only
when notification upon occurrence is
selected.
Paper
Supply
Warning
Paper
Supply
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper. Effective only
when periodic notification is selected.
Paper
Paper
Supply Error Supply Error
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Immediate
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper. Effective only
when notification upon occurrence is
selected.
Paper
Paper
Supply Error Supply Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper. Effective only
when periodic notification is selected.
Printing
Paper
Warning
Printing
Paper
Warning
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper feed. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Printing
Paper
Warning
Printing
Paper
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding paper feed. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
- 149 -
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Printing
Paper Error
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
2H0M
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper feed. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Printing
Paper Error
Printing
Paper Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding paper feed. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Storage
Device
Warning
Storage
Device
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the storage device.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Storage
Device
Warning
Storage
Device
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the storage device.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Print Result
Warning
Print Result
Warning
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding an error that affects
the print results. Effective only when
notification upon occurrence is selected.
Print Result
Warning
Print Result
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding an error that affects
the print results. Effective only when
periodic notification is selected.
Print Result
Error
Print Result
Error EVENT
1-5
-
-
-
2H0M
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error that affects the print results.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Print Result
Error
Print Result
Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error that affects the print results.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Warning
Interface
Warning
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the interface.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Warning
Interface
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the interface.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Error
Interface
Error EVENT
1-5
-
-
-
2H0M
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the interface. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Interface
Anomaly
Error
Interface
Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the interface. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Security
Warning
Security
Warning
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the security function.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Security
Warning
Security
Warning
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the security function.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
- 150 -
9
Network Settings
Printing
Paper Error
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Scanner
Warning
Scanner
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the scanner. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Scanner
Warning
Scanner
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the scanner. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Scanner
Error
Scanner
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the scanner. Effective
only when notification upon occurrence
is selected.
Scanner
Error
Scanner
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the scanner. Effective
only when periodic notification is
selected.
Fax Warning FAX
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the fax function.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Fax Warning FAX
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of a
warning regarding the fax function.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Fax Error
FAX
Warning/
Error EVENT
1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the fax function.
Effective only when notification upon
occurrence is selected.
Fax Error
FAX
Warning/
Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to notify you of an
error regarding the fax function.
Effective only when periodic notification
is selected.
Other Error
Other Error
EVENT 1-5
-
-
-
2H0M
Specifies whether to notify you of other
errors. Effective only when notification
upon occurrence is selected.
Other Error
Other Error
PERIOD 1-5
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to notify you of other
errors. Effective only when periodic
notification is selected.
 SNMP
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Use SNMP
Settings
SNMP
Version
-
-
-
SNMPv3+v1
Specifies the SNMP version.
User Name
User Name
-
-
-
root
Sets the user name in SNMPv3 up to 32
characters.
Authenticati
on Settings
Passphrase
Auth
Passphrase
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets the password to create an
authentication key for SNMPv3 packet
authentication. From 8 to 32 characters
can be used.
- 151 -
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
-
Auth Key
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets the authentication key for SNMPv3
packet authentication in HEX code.
Maximum number of characters depends
on the algorithm you select.
Authenticati
on Settings
Algorithm
Auth
Algorithm
-
-
-
MD5
Specifies the algorithm for SNMPv3
packet authentication.
Encryption
Settings
Passphrase
Privacy
Passphrase
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets the password to create an
authentication key for SNMPv3 packet
encryption. From 8 to 32 characters can
be used.
Privacy Key
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets the authentication key for SNMPv3
packet encryption in HEX code. Sixteen
octets (32 characters of HEX code) can
be used.
Encryption
Settings
Algorithm
Privacy
Algorithm
-
-
-
DES
Specifies the algorithm for SNMPv3
packet encryption. You cannot change
this value.
New SNMP
Read
Community
Read
Community
-
-
-
public
Sets the read community for SNMPv1 up
to 15 characters.
New SNMP
Write
Community
Write
Community
-
-
-
public
Sets the write community for SNMPv1
up to 15 characters.
-
 SNMP Trap
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Prn-Trap
Community
-
-
-
public
Sets the community name for a printer
trap up to 31 characters.
Address 1-5
TCP #1-5
Trap
Address
-
-
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies a trap destination in TCP/IP.
You can specify up to 5 destinations.
Trap Enable
1-5
TCP #1-5
Trap Enable
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use a printer trap in
TCP #1-5.
Printer
Reboot 1-5
TCP #1-5
Printer
Reboot Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the machine has
rebooted.
Receive
Illegal Trap
1-5
TCP #1-5
Receive
Illegal Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use a trap when a
community name other than the one set
in [Printer Trap Community Name
Set] is used to access the machine.
Online 1-5
TCP #1-5
Online Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine comes
online.
Offline 1-5
TCP #1-5
Offline Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine goes
offline.
- 152 -
9
Network Settings
Printer Trap
Community
Name Set
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Paper Out
1-5
TCP #1-5
Paper Out
Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the machine runs out of
paper.
Paper Jam
1-5
TCP #1-5
Paper Jam
Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the paper jams.
Cover Open
1-5
TCP #1-5
Cover Open
Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine's cover
opens.
Printer Error
1-5
TCP #1-5
Printer Error
Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when an error occurs.
IPX
IPX Trap
Net/Address
-
-
-
00000000:00
0000000000
Specifies a trap destination in IPX.
Specify the value as "(network
address):(node address)". You can
specify only one address.
IPX Trap
Enable
IPX Trap
Enable
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use a printer trap in
IPX.
IPX Online
IPX Online
Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine comes
online.
IPX Offline
IPX Offline
Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine goes
offline.
OPX Paper
Out
IPX Paper
Out Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the machine runs out of
paper.
IPX Paper
Jam
IPX Paper
Jam Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when the paper jams.
IPX Cover
Open
IPX Cover
Open Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message every time the machine's cover
opens.
IPX Printer
Error
IPX Printer
Error Trap
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to send an SNMP
message when an error occurs.
 IPP
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
IPP
-
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use IPP.
Message from
Administrator
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Enter a message in a language that
accords to the language selected in
[Character Encoding] and
[Language].
Character
Encoding
-
-
-
-
UTF-8
Specifies a character encoding to use
when submitting settings to the
machine.
Language
-
-
-
-
EN-US
Specifies the language used in settings
that contain text strings.
- 153 -
Network Setting Items
Item
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
Authentication
-
-
-
-
NONE
Specifies whether to use
authentication when performing IPP
printing.
User Name
1-50
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
If you select [BASIC] in
[Authentication], specify a user
name up to 63 characters.
Password
1-50
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
If you select [BASIC] in
[Authentication], specify a password
up to 16 characters.
 Windows Rally
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
WSD Print
WSD Print
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use WSD Print.
LLTD
LLTD
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use LLTD.
 IEEE802.1X
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
802.1X
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use IEEE802.1X.
EAP Type
EAP Type
-
-
-
EAP-TLS
Specifies the EAP method.
EAP User
EAP User
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the user name to be used for
EAP up to 64 characters.
EAP
Password
EAP
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the password to be used for
EAP up to 64 characters. Effective only
when [PEAP] is selected in [EAP Type].
Client
Certificate
Setting
Use SSL
Certificate
-
-
-
Use SSL/TLS
certificate for
EAP
authentication
.
Specifies whether to use an SSL/TLS
certificate in IEEE802.1X authentication.
It is unavailable when no SSL/TLS
certificate is installed. Effective only
when EAP-TLS is selected.
CA
Certification
Setting
Authenticat
e Server
-
-
-
Authenticate
Server
Specifies whether to use a CA certificate
to authenticate the certificate sent from
the RADIUS server.
-
EAP retry
-
-
-
3
Specifies the number of retries of
IEEE802.1X authentication.
-
EAP timeout
-
-
-
40
Specifies the timeout value to wait for
the server response during IEE802.1X
authentication.
- 154 -
9
Network Settings
IEEE802.1X
Network Setting Items
 Secure Protocol Server Settings (Kerberos)
Item
Web
page
Domain
Name
TELNET
Domain
Name
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
-
-
-
Factory
Default
Setting
(NULL)
Description
Specifies the realm name for Kerberos
authentication.
 LDAP Server Settings
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
LDAP Server LDAP Server
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the LDAP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address. Be sure
to configure DNS settings if you enter a
domain name.
Port Number LDAP Port
Number
-
-
-
389
Specifies the port number of the LDAP
server.
Timeout
-
-
-
30
Specifies the timeout value to wait for
the LDAP server response.
Max. Entries Max Entry
-
-
-
100
Specifies the maximum number of
search results.
DN Name
Search Root
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies where to search (BaseDN) in
LDAP search.
User Name
1
User Name
1
-
-
-
cn
Specifies the attribute name searched
for as the user name.
User Name
2
User Name
2
-
-
-
sn
User Name
3
User Name
3
-
-
-
givenName
Mail Address Mail Address
-
-
-
mail
Specifies the attribute name searched
for as the user name.
Additional
Filter
Additional
Filter
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies additional filters for LDAP
search.
Method
Authenticati
on Method
-
-
-
Anonymous
Specifies the authentication method for
LDAP server.
User ID
Authenticati
on User ID
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a user ID to access the LDAP
server.
Password
Authenticati
on User
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a password to access the LDAP
server.
Encryption
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
None
Specifies the method to encrypt LDAP
communication.
LDAP
Timeout
- 155 -
Network Setting Items
 Mail Server Settings
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
SMTP
Server
SMTP
Server
Name
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the SMTP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address.
Be sure to configure DNS settings if you
enter a domain name.
SMTP Port
Number
SMTP Port
Number
-
-
-
25
Specifies the SMTP port number.
SMTP
Encryption
Scheme
SMTP
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
None
Specifies the method to encrypt the
SMTP (E-mail) send protocol.
POP3 Server POP Server
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the POP server name. Enter
the domain name or IP address.
Be sure to configure DNS settings if you
enter a domain name.
POP3 Port
Number
POP Port
Number
-
-
-
110
Specifies the port number to access the
POP server.
POP
Encryption
Scheme
POP
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
None
Specifies the method to encrypt POP
communication.
Authenticati
on Method
SMTP-Auth
Method
-
-
-
None
Specifies whether to perform SMTP
authentication.
SMTP User
ID
SMTP
Server User
ID
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a user ID for SMTP authentication.
SMTP
Password
SMTP
Server
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a password for SMTP
authentication.
POP User ID POP Server
UserID
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a user ID to access the POP server.
POP
Password
POP Server
Password
-
-
-
(NULL)
Sets a password to access the POP
server.
APOP
Support
Use APOP
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use APOP.
9
 Security
Web
page
-
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
TCP/IP
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use TCP/IP.
NetBEUI
NetBEUI
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use NetBEUI.
NetBIOS
over TCP
NetBIOS
over TCP
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use NetBIOS over
TCP.
NetWare
NetWare
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use NetWare.
EtherTalk
EtherTalk
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use EtherTalk.
Web (Port
No.: 80)
WEB
(Default
Port 80)
Enable
Specifies whether to use the web page
to access the machine.
Device
Settings
(Web) Enable
Printer
Settings
(Web)
Web Page
Settings
- 156 -
Network Settings
Item
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
TELNET
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
Web (IPP)
-
-
-
80
Specifies the port number to access the
web page of the machine.
IPP (Port
No.: 631)
IPP (Default
Port 631)
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use IPP.
Telnet
Telnet
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use TELNET to
access the machine.
FTP
FTP
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use FTP to access
the machine.
SNMP
SNMP
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use SNMP to access
the machine.
POP
POP3 
(E-Mail)
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use POP3.
POP
POP
-
-
-
110
Specifies the port number for POP3.
SNTP
SNTP
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use SNTP.
Local Ports
Local Ports
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use a unique
protocol.
SMTP
(E-Mail)
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use SMTP send.
SMTP Send
SMTP Send
-
-
-
25
Specifies the port number for SMTP
send.
SMTP Send
SMTP
Receive
-
-
-
25
Specifies the port number for SMTP
receive.
Network
Password
Change
Password
(last six digits
of MAC
address)
Sets a new administrator password up to
15 characters. The password is casesensitive. This password is used only
when you change settings from the
utilities. The administrator password set
in the machine cannot be changed from
this item.
-
Password
Change
Password
Change
Change
Password
 IP Filtering
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
IP Filtering
IP Filtering
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use IP filtering.
Be sure to configure the following
settings of this category when you
enable IP filtering. If you do not, you
cannot access the machine via TCP/
IP.
Start Address
1-10
Start
Address
#1-10
-
-
-
0.0.0.0
End Address
1-10
End Address
#1-10
-
-
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies IP addresses that are
allowed to access the machine. You
can specify an individual address or
an address range.
Printing
1-10
IP Address
Range
#1-10 Print
-
-
-
Disable
- 157 -
Specifies whether to allow print jobs
from specified IP addresses.
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Configuration 1- IP Address
10
Range
#1-10
Configuration
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to allow settings
changes from specified IP addresses.
Administrator's Admin IP
IP Address to
Address
Register
-
-
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the administrator IP
address automatically. Only this
address can always access the
machine.
When the administrator accesses the
machine via a proxy server, all access
via the proxy server is allowed.
 MAC Address Filtering
Item
Web
page
MAC Address
Filtering
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use MAC address
filtering. This function is used to
control access from MAC addresses.
Be sure to configure the following
settings of this category when you
enable MAC address filtering. If not,
you cannot access the machine via a
network.
Communication MAC
from the
Address
following MAC
Access
Addresses
-
-
-
Accept
Specifies whether to accept or block
the access from specified MAC
addresses.
MAC Address
1-50
-
-
-
00:00:00:00:
00:00
Specifies MAC addresses to which the
filtering is applied.
-
-
-
00:00:00:00:
00:00
Specifies the administrator MAC
address automatically. Only this
address can always access the machine.
When the administrator accesses the
machine via a proxy server, all access
via the proxy server is allowed.
MAC
Address
#1-50
Administrator's Admin MAC
MAC Address to Address
Register
 Encryption (SSL/TLS)
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
HTTP/IPP
HTTP/IPP
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to encrypt HTTP/IPP
communication.
HTTP/IPP
Cipher
Strength
HTTP/IPP
Cipher
Strength
-
-
-
Standard
Specifies whether to encrypt HTTP/IPP
communication.
- 158 -
9
Network Settings
MAC
Address
Filtering
Network Setting Items
Item
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Web
page
TELNET
FTP Receive
FTP Receive
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to encrypt reception
via FTP.
FTP Receive  FTP Receive
Cipher
Cipher
Strength
Strength
-
-
-
Standard
Specifies the strength of encryption of
reception via FTP.
SMTP
Receive
SMTP
Receive
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to encrypt reception
via SMTP.
SMTP
Receive
Cipher
Strength
SMTP
Receive
Cipher
Strength
-
-
-
Standard
Specifies the strength of encryption of
reception via SMTP.
Select
Certificate
Type to
Create
-
-
-
-
Use selfsigned
Certificate
Creates a self-signed certificate. In
addition, creates a CSR to send to a
certificate authority and installs a
certificate issued by a certificate
authority.
Common
Name
-
-
-
-
(Machine's IP
Address)
The machine's IP address is specified
when you create a self-signed
certificate.
Organization
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the official name of the
organization you belong to up to 64
characters.
Organizational
Unit
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the name of the sub-group
(e.g. branch) you belong to up to 64
characters.
Locality
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the name of the locality you
are in up to 128 characters.
State/
Province
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the name of the state or
province you are in up to 128
characters.
Country/
Region
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the country code or region
code in 2 characters.
Key
Exchange
Method
-
-
-
-
RSA
Specifies the key method for encrypted
communication.
Key Size
-
-
-
-
1024 bit
Specifies the key size for encrypted
communication.
 IPSec
Item
Web
page
IPSec
TELNET
IPSec
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies whether to use IPSec.
IP Address
1-50
-
-
-
-
0.0.0.0
Specifies the host allowed to
communicate by IPSec.
IKE
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
-
3DES-CBC
Specifies the IKE encryption method.
- 159 -
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
IKE Hash
Algorithm
-
-
-
-
SHA-1
Specifies the IKE hash method.
DiffieHellman
Group
-
-
-
-
Group2
Specifies the Diffie-Hellman group to be
used for "Phase 1 Proposal".
LifeTime
-
-
-
-
28800
(seconds)
Specifies the lifetime of "ISAKMP SA".
Pre-shared
Key
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the pre-shared key.
Key PFS
-
-
-
-
NOPFS
Specifies whether to use Key PFS
(Perfect Forward Secrecy).
Diffie
Hellman
Group when
Key PFS
Enable
-
-
-
-
None
Specifies the Diffie-Hellman group used
by Key PFS.
ESP
-
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use ESP
(Encapsulating Security Payload).
ESP
Encryption
Algorithm
-
-
-
-
3DES-CBC
Specifies the encryption algorithm for
ESP.
ESP
Authenticati
on
Algorithm
-
-
-
-
SHA-1
Specifies the authentication algorithm
for ESP.
AH
-
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to use AH
(Authentication Header).
AH
Authenticati
on
Algorithm
-
-
-
-
SHA-1
Specifies the authentication algorithm
for AH.
LifeTime
-
-
-
-
3600
(seconds)
Specifies the lifetime of "IPSec SA".
9
 Maintenance
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Network
Reset
Card Reboot Network
Card
-
-
-
Disable
Use to reboot Network Card
Reset
Network
Card to
Factory
Default
Restore
Network
Card to
Factory
Default
-
-
-
Disable
Use to restore the network settings to
factory default.
LAN Scale
Setting
LAN Scale
Setting
-
-
-
Normal
Use the factory default value. [SMALL]
is recommended only when you use a
small LAN to which a few computers are
connected.
- 160 -
Network Settings
Item
Network Setting Items
Item
Web
page
Network PSProtocol
TELNET
-
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
-
-
-
RAW
Specifies the protocol for communication
of PostScript data via the network.
HEX Dump
HEX Dump
Mode
-
-
-
NO
Specifies whether to show the received
print data in 16 hexadecimal notation.
Restarting the machine disables this
mode.
HUB Link
Setting
HUB Link
Setting
-
-
-
Automatic
Specifies the speed and method of
communication between the hub and the
machine.
 Time Setup (SNTP Settings)
Item
Web
page
Time Setup
TELNET
-
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
-
-
-
Manual
Specifies the method to set date an time
(i.e., manually or automatically).
SNTP Server NTP Server
(Primary)
(Pri.)
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the IP address of the primary
SNTP server in order to get the current
time.
SNTP Server NTP Server
(Secondary) (Sec.)
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies the IP address of the
secondary SNTP server in order to get
the current time.
Time Zone
-
-
-
-12:00
Specifies the time difference between
GMT and your local time.
Local Time
Zone
 Web Printing
Item
Web
page
TELNET
Configurati Network Card Setup
on Tool/
Network
(Windows) (Mac OS X)
Setting
Plug-in
Factory
Default
Setting
Description
Paper Tray
-
-
-
-
Tray 1
Specifies the tray to be used for print
jobs.
Copies
-
-
-
-
1
Specifies the number of copies.
Collate
-
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to collate the output.
Fit to page
-
-
-
-
Enable
Specifies whether to fit the document
size to the paper size.
Duplex
printing
-
-
-
-
(NULL)
Specifies whether to and how to bind a
duplex job.
Page Select
-
-
-
-
Disable
Specifies the pages to be printed.
PDF
Password
-
-
-
-
Disable
Select this item and enter the necessary
password when you print an encrypted
PDF file.
- 161 -
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
 Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
This section explains how to change the network settings from the machine's web page.
To access the machine's web page, your computer must meet the following conditions:
 TCP/IP is enabled.
 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, Safari 3.0 or later, or Firefox 3.0 or later is installed.
Memo
 Ensure that the security setting of the web browser is set to a middle level, or that cookies are allowed.
 To enter the [Admin Setup] menu, it is necessary to log in as the administrator. The factory default administrator password is
"aaaaaa".
Reference
 Some of the following settings can be performed on other utilities. For details, refer to "Network Setting Items" P. 143.
Encrypting Communication by
SSL/TLS
6
Check the settings and click [OK].
7
If you are creating a self-signed
certificate, follow the on-screen
instructions and close the web page.
Then go to "Enabling Encryption". 
If you are getting a certificate issued by
a certificate authority, go to step 8.
8
Follow the on-screen instructions to send
a CSR to a certificate authority.
9
Click [OK].
You can encrypt communication between your
computer and the machine. Communication is
encrypted by SSL/TLS in the following cases:
 Change of the machine settings from the web page
 IPP printing
 Direct print
 LDAP search
 Send data via SMTP or FTP
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to
 Print received data via SMTP or FTP
install a certificate from the certificate
authority.
Creating a Certificate
You can create a certificate on the web page. The
following two certificates are available:
 A self-signed certificate.
Note
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
4
After creating a certificate, perform the following
procedure to enable encryption.
When you change the settings from the web
page to enable encryption, communication is
encrypted immediately after that change has
been made.
1
Perform "Creating a Certificate" steps 1
to 3 to enter the encryption screen.
Select [Network Manager] >
[Security] > [Encryption (SSL/TLS)].
2
Select [Enable] for the desired protocol
on which encryption is applied.
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
3
Click [Encryption Strength Settings].
4
Select the encryption strength and click
[OK].
5
Click [Send].
Memo
 The machine's IP address is set to [Common Name].
5
Click [Send].
- 162 -
9
Network Settings
 If you change the machine IP address after you create a
certificate, the certificate becomes invalid. Be sure not to
change the machine's IP address after creating a
certificate.
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
12 Go to "Enabling Encryption".
Enabling Encryption
 A certificate created by a certificate authority.
1
11 Click [Send].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
Opening the Web Page
6
Click [Have Disk].
7
Insert the software CD-ROM into the
computer.
8
Enter the following value in [Copy
from], and then click [Use].
Memo
 Ensure to enable the protocol on which encryption is
applied in "Enabling Encryption" P. 162.
1
Launch a web browser.
2
Enter "https://your machine's IP
address" in the URL address bar and
then press the <Enter> key.
- For PCL driver, "D:\Drivers\EN\PCL".
- For PS driver, "D:\Drivers\EN\PS".
- For PCL XPS driver, "D:\Drivers\EN\XPS".
Memo
 In the above examples, the CD-ROM drive is setup as
the D drive.
9
Select the NFL file and click [Open].
10 Click [OK].
IPP Printing
11 Select a model and click [OK].
IPP printing allows you to transmit your print job
data from your computer to the machine via the
Internet.
12 Click [Next].
 Enabling IPP Printing
14 Print the test page after installation is
complete.
IPP printing is disabled by factory default. To
perform IPP printing, enable IPP first.
1
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager] > [IPP].
4
Select [Enable].
5
 Setting Up Your Machine As an IPP
Printer (for Mac OS X Only)
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Add your machine to your computer as an IPP
printer.
1
Reference
Click [Send].
Add your machine to your computer as an IPP
printer.
1
Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers] > [Add a printer].
2
On the [Add Printer] wizard, select
[Add a network, wireless or
Bluetooth printer].
Insert the software CD-ROM into the
computer and install the driver.
 "User's Manual Basic"
 Setting Up Your Machine As an IPP
Printer (for Windows Only)
3
13 Click [Finish].
In the list of available printers, select
[The printer I am looking for is not
listed].
4
Select [Select a shared printer by
name].
5
Enter "http://your machine's IP address/
ipp" or "http://your machine's IP
address/ipp/lp" and then click [Next].
2
Select "System Preferences" from the
Apple menu.
3
Click [Print and Fax].
4
Click [ + ].
5
Click the [IP] tab.
6
From[Protocol], select [IPP (Internet
Printing Protocol)].
7
Enter the machine's IP address in
[Address].
8
Enter "ipp/Ip" in [Queue].
9
Click [Add].
10 Click [Continue].
11 Confirm that the machine is registered in
- 163 -
[Print and Fax].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
 Performing IPP Printing
5
Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Memo
 The following steps are explained using NotePad as an
example. The steps and menus may differ depending on
the application you use.
Note
 If you were unable to set up IPSec because of an
inconsistency between the parameters that were specified,
you will be unable to access the web page. In this case,
either disable IPSec from the control panel of the machine,
or initialize the network settings.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3
Select the IPP printer you created from
[Select Printer], and then click [Print].
Encrypting Communication by
IPSec
You can encrypt communication between your
computer and the machine.
The communication is encrypted by IPSec. When
IPSec is enabled, encryption is applied for all the
applications using IP protocols.
You can specify up to 50 hosts by their IP
addresses. When a host that is not registered
tries to access the machine, it is rejected. When
you try to access a host that is not registered,
the attempt is invalid.
Be sure to configure the machine in advance,
before configuring your computer.
Configuring Your Computer
Memo
 Be sure to configure the machine in advance, before
configuring your computer.
Click [Start] and select [Control Panel]>
[System and Security]> [Administrative
Tools].
2
Double-click [Local Security Policy].
3
On the [Local Security Policy] window,
click [IP Security Policy (Local
Computer)].
4
From the [Action] menu, select [Create
IP Security Policy].
5
On the [IP Security Policy Wizard],
click [Next].
6
Enter a [Name] and a [Description]
and then click [Next].
7
Select the [Activate the default
response rule (earlier versions of
Windows only)] check box and then
click [Next].
8
Select [Edit Properties] and then click
[Finish].
9
On the IP security policy properties
window, select the [General] tab.
Memo
 You must have a pre-shared key readied in advance.
Configuring Your Machine
In order to enable IPSec, your machine must first
be configured from the web page.
Note
 When you enable IPSec, the communication that is to and
from a host not specified in this procedure is rejected.
Memo
 Be sure to make a note of the values you specify in these
steps. They are necessary when you configure the IPSec
settings on your computer.
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager] >
[Security] > [IPSec].
4
10 Click [Settings].
11 On the [Key Exchange Settings]
window, enter a value (minutes) for
[Authenticate and generate a new
key after every].
Note
 Specify the same value as [Lifetime] specified in the
configuration for "Phase1 Proposal" in "Configuring
Your Machine". Although [Lifetime] is specified in
seconds, enter a value in minutes for this step.
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Memo
 Either [ESP] or [AH] must be enabled in the
configuration for "Phase2 Proposal".
12 Click [Methods].
- 164 -
9
Network Settings
1
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
13 On the [Key Exchange Security
32 On the [Security Rule Wizard], select
Methods] window, click [Add].
the new IP filter from the list and then
click [Next].
14 Specify [Integrity algorithm],
33 On the [Filter Action] screen, click
[Encryption algorithm], and [DiffieHellman group].
[Add].
34 On the [Filter Action Wizard], click
Note
[Next].
 Select the same value that was specified in [IKE
Encryption Algorithm], [IKE Hush Algorithm],
and [Diffie-Hellman group] at the time of
configuration for "Phase1 Proposal" in "Configuring
Your Machine" P. 164.
35 On the [Filter Action Name] screen,
enter a [Name] and a [Description]
and then click [Next].
15 Click [OK].
36 On the [Filter Action General Options]
16 On the [Key Exchange Security
screen, select [Negotiate security] and
then click [Next].
Methods] window, click [OK].
17 On the [Key Exchange Settings]
37 On the [Communicating with
window, click [OK].
computers that do not support
IPsec] screen, select [Do not allow
unsecured communication] and then
click [Next].
18 On the IP security policy properties
window, select the [Rules] tab.
19 Click [Add].
38 On the [IP Traffic Security] screen,
select[Custom] and then click
[Settings].
20 On the [Security Rule Wizard], click
[Next].
39 On the [Custom Security Method
21 On the [Tunnel Endpoint] screen,
Settings] window, configure the settings
and then click [OK].
select [This rule does not specify a
tunnel and then click [Next].
22 On the [Network Type] screen, select
Note
 Configure the AH and ESP settings to the same
settings as configured for the "Phase2 Proposal" in
"Configuring Your Machine" P. 164.
[All Network Connections] and then
click [Next].
23 On the [IP Filter List] screen, click
40 On the [IP Traffic Security] screen,
[Add].
click [Next].
24 On the [IP Filter List] window, click
41 Select [Edit Properties] and then click
[Add].
[Finish].
25 On the [IP Filter Wizard], click [Next].
42 On the filter action properties window,
select [Use session key perfect
forward secrecy (PFS)] if you want to
enable Key PFS.
26 On the [IP Filter Description and
Mirrored Property] screen, click
[Next].
27 On the [IP Traffic Source] screen, click
43 Select [Accept unsecured
communication, but always respond
using IPsec] if you perform IPSec
communication by the IPv6 global
address.
[Next].
28 On the [IP Traffic Destination] screen,
click [Next].
29 On the [IP Protocol Type] screen, click
[Next].
44 Click [OK].
45 Select the new filter action and then click
[Next].
30 Click [Finish].
31 On the [IP Filter List] window, click
46 On the [Authentication Method]
screen, select the authentication method
you want and then click [Next].
[OK].
- 165 -
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
47 Click [Finish].
Control Access Using MAC
Address (MAC Address
Filtering)
48 On the IP security policy properties
window, click [OK].
49 On the [Local Security Policy] window,
select the new IP security policy.
50 From the [Action] menu, select
You can control access to the machine using the
MAC address. You can allow or reject the access
from the specified MAC addresses.
[Assign].
Note
51 Make sure that for the new IP security
 Be sure to specify the correct MAC address. If you specify
the wrong MAC address, you cannot access the machine
via a network.
52 Click [X] on the [Local Security Policy]
 You cannot specify to accept or to reject for each address
individually.
policy, [Policy Assigned] is displayed as
[Yes].
Memo
screen.
Controlling Access Using IP
Address (IP Filtering)
You can control access to the machine using the
IP address. You can set whether to allow
configuration or printing from the IP addresses
specified. By factory default, IP filtering is
disabled.
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager]>
[Security]>[MAC Address Filtering].
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Note
Note
 Be sure to specify the correct IP address. If you specify a
wrong IP address, you cannot access the machine using
the IP protocol.
 If nothing is registered in [Administrator's MAC
Address to Register], you may not be able to access
the machine depending on the specified MAC address.
 When you enable IP filtering, the access to and from a host
that is not specified in these steps is rejected.
 If you use a proxy server, [Your Current Local
Host/Proxy MAC Address] and the MAC address of
your host may not match.
Memo
5
 You can use only IPv4 for IP filtering.
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager]>
[Security]>[IP Filtering].
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
9
Note
 If nothing is registered in[Administrator's IP
Address to Register], you may not be able to access
the machine depending on the specified IP address
range.
 If you use a proxy server, [Your Current Local
Host/Proxy IP Address] and the IP address of your
host may not match.
5
Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
- 166 -
Network Settings
1
Click [Send].
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
Error Notification by E-mail
(E-mail Alert)
You can set the machine to send an error
notification e-mail when an error occurs. You can
set when to be notified:
3
Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail]>
[Alert Settings].
4
Enter an e-mail address to receive the
alerts.
5
Click [Setting] for the specified address.
[Copy] is useful when you want to apply the alert
conditions to another address..
 On a periodical basis
 Only when an error occurs
Configuring Your Machine
You can configure the settings for e-mail alert
using the web page.
6
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
7
Click [OK].
8
Click [View a summary of current
configuration] to check the current
settings, and then click [X] to close the
window.
Memo
 If you have configured the settings for Scan To Mail / Scan
To Internet Fax that are described in the "User's Manual
Basic", the server configuration is complete.
You can also check the current settings of up to
two addresses on the main window. Select the
desired addresses to check from the list box.
 When you specify a domain name in [SMTP Server],
configure the DNS server in the [TCP/IP] setting.
 You need to set the mail server to allow the machine to
send an e-mail. For details on the mail server setting, refer
to your network administrator.
 If you use Internet Explorer 7, be sure to configure the
settings below before you send a test mail. In the browser,
select [Tools] > [Internet Options], then click [Custom
Level] on the [Security] tab. Then select [Enable] in
[Allow websites to prompt for information using
scripted windows].
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail]>
[Send Settings].
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
5
Select [Set detail of the SMTP
Protocol].
6
If necessary, you can configure
[Security Settings], [Configure
attached information], and [Others].
7
9
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Memo
 If there is no error specified, the alert e-mail is not sent.
Alert At Time of Error Occurrence
1
2
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
Specify the time to sending of an error
alert and then click [OK].
If you specify a longer time, you are only notified
of persisting errors.
3
Click [OK].
4
Click [View a summary of current
configuration] to check the current
settings, and then click [X] to close the
window.
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
1
Perform steps 1 to 6 in "Regular Alert".
When an error or warning is selected to require
notification, a window will display to specify the
time between error occurrence and sending the
alert.
Click [Send].
Regular Alert
Click [Send].
You can also check the current settings of up to
two addresses on the main window. Select the
desired addresses to check from the list box.
5
Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
- 167 -
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
Operation is confirmed under specific conditions
for the following applications.
Using SNMPv3
When you use the SNMP manager that supports
SNMPv3, the management of the machine is
encrypted by SNMP.
Protocol
OS
Application
Condi
tion
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
LPD
 Windows 7
LPR (Command
 Windows Vista Prompt)
 Windows XP
*1, 2, 3
2
Select [Admin Setup].
Port9100
 Windows 7
LPRng
 Windows Vista
*1, 2, 3
3
Select [Network Manager]>[SNMP]>
[Setting].
FTP
 Windows 7
FTP (Command
 Windows Vista Prompt)
 Windows XP
*1, 2, 3
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
 Mac OS X
FTP (Terminal)
*1, 2, 3
 Windows XP
Internet Explorer
6.0
*1, 2, 3
 Mac OS X
Safari (2.0v412.2)
*1, 2,
3, 4
5
HTTP
Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Telnet
Memo
 Your machine has an SNMP agent. You can confirm and
change the machine settings by a commercially available
SNMP agent. For the MIB of the machine, refer to the
software CD-ROM and check the "README" file in the
[Misc] > [MIB] folder.
 Windows 7
Telnet (Command
 Windows Vista Prompt)
 Windows XP
*1, 2, 3
 Mac OS X
*1, 2, 3
Telnet (Terminal)
Your machine supports IPv6. The machine
obtains the IPv6 address automatically. You
cannot set the IPv6 address manually.
*1) To specify a host name, edit the host's
file or access via the DNS server.
*2) On Telnet, when only IPv6 is enabled
you cannot specify a host name by the
DNS server.
*3) You cannot specify a host name when
you use a link local address to access.
*4) Enter an IPv6 address enclosed with
square brackets.
The machine supports the following protocols:
Note
Using IPv6
 For Printing:
- LPR
- IPP
- RAW (Port9100)
- FTP
 For Configuration:
- SNMPv1/v3
- Telnet
Enabling IPv6
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager]>[TCP/IP].
4
Select [Enable] for [IPv6].
5
Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
- 168 -
9
Network Settings
- HTTP
 To use IPv6 on Windows XP, install IPv6.
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
Checking IPv6 Address
10 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
The OPv6 address is automatically assigned.
1
Select [View Info].
2
Select [Network]>[TCP/IP].
11 When the standby screen appears on the
machine, turn off the machine.
12 Go to "Connecting Your Machine to
Authentication Switch" P. 170.
Memo
 When the global address is displayed only as zeros, it may
be an error due to the router being used.
Reference
 You can also check the IPv6 address in the network report
from the machine by pressing the <SETTING> key and
then selecting [Report Print] > [View Info] > [Network
Information]. For details on the report and how to print
it, refer to "Printing Reports" P. 73.
 Using EAP-TLS
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager]>
[IEEE802.1X].
4
Select [Enable] for [IEEE802.1X].
5
Select [EAP-TLS] for [EAP Type].
6
Enter a user name in [EAP User].
7
Select [Do not use SSL/TLS
Certificate for EAP authentication]
and then click [Import].
8
Enter the file name of the certificate.
Using IEEE802.1X
Your machine supports the IEEE802.1X
authentication.
Be sure to configure your machine and your
computer in advance before performing the
following steps.
Reference
 For details on the initial setup and the IP address, refer to
the User's Manual Basic.
Only a PKCS#12 file can be imported.
Configuring Your Machine for
IEEE802.1X
9
 Using PEAP
Enter the password of the certificate and
then click [OK].
10 Select [Authenticate Server] and then
click [Import].
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
and then click [OK].
3
Select [Network Manager]>
[IEEE802.1X].
4
Select [Enable] for [IEEE802.1X].
Specify the certificate issued by the certificate
authority, which is the certificate authority from
which the RADIUS server obtained the certificate.
A PEM, DER, and PKCS#7 file can be imported.
5
Select [PEAP] for [EAP Type].
6
Enter a user name in [EAP User].
7
Enter a password in [EAP Password].
8
Select [Authenticate Server] and then
click [Import].
9
11 Enter the file name of the CA certificate
12 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
13 When the standby screen appears on the
machine, turn off the machine.
14 Go to "Connecting Your Machine to
Enter the file name of the CA certificate
and then click [OK].
Specify the certificate issued by the certificate
authority, which is the certificate authority from
which the RADIUS server obtained the certificate.
A PEM, DER, and PKCS#7 file can be imported.
- 169 -
Authentication Switch" P. 170.
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
Connecting Your Machine to
Authentication Switch
12 Select the authentication method you
want in [Method].
1
Make sure that the machine is turned off.
2
Connect an Ethernet cable to the
network interface port.
3
Connect the Ethernet cable to the
authentication port of an authentication
switch.
4
Turn on the machine.
5
Set up the machine.
Note
 When you select [Anonymous] or [Simple], user
authentication using LDAP fails. You need to select
[Digest-MD5] or [Secure Protocol] if you configure
the LDAP server for user authentication.
Memo
 When you select [Digest-MD5], you need to
configure the DNS server setting.
 When you select [Secure Protocol], you need to
configure the DNS server and the secure protocol
server settings.
13 If you do not select [Anonymous] in
step 12, specify the user ID and
password to log in to the LDAP server.
Reference
 For details on the initial setup, refer to the User's
Manual Basic.
14 Select the encryption method in
[Encryption].
Configuring LDAP Server
15 Click [Send].
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
Reference
 For details on the LDAP server and encryption setting,
refer to your network administrator.
1
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager]>[LDAP
Server Setting].
4
Configuring Secure Protocols
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
Authentication using the Kerberos server is
available when you access the LDAP server. In
order to use the secure protocol, be sure to
complete the SNTP and DNS server settings.
Enter the domain name or IP address of
the LDAP server in [LDAP Server].
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
Enter the port number of the LDAP
server in [Port Number].
3
Select [Network Manager]>[Secure
Protocol Server Setting].
6
Specify a value of time-out to wait for
the search results in [Timeout].
4
Enter a realm name in [Domain Name].
7
Specify a value for the maximum number
of entries into the search results in
[Max. Entries].
5
Click [Send].
8
Specify a BaseDN to access the LDAP
server in [DN Name].
9
Enter attribute names to be searched for
as the user name in [User Name].
Be sure to specify a value for [Name 1].
10 Enter an e-mail address to be searched
for in [Mail Address].
11 If necessary, specify a search condition
in [Additional Filters].
- 170 -
The network card reboots to enable the new
settings.
9
Network Settings
5
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
Printing Without Printer Driver
(Direct Print)
5
Memo
 Be sure to specify the correct settings for your mail
server. If you enable APOP when your mail server does
not support the APOP protocol, e-mails may not be
received correctly.
Printing PDF Files
You can print PDF files without installing the
printer driver. Specify the file you want to print
on the web page and sent it to the machine.
 When you specify a domain name for the mail server,
configure the DNS server in the [TCP/IP] setting.
6
Memo
 Additional RAM memory may be necessary depending on
the PDF file.
 Printing may not be correct depending on the PDF file.
When printing is not correct, open the file with Adobe
Reader and then print.
1
Access the machine's web page.
2
Click [Direct Print].
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
Click [Send].
Memo
 If the POP server does not support the SSL encryption, emails may not be received correctly.
 Configuration for SMTP
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
Select [Web Printing].
2
Select [Admin Setup].
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
3
Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail] >
[Receive Settings].
5
Check the settings and then click [OK].
4
Select [SMTP] and then click [To
STEP2].
5
Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify detailed settings.
6
Click [Send].
The data is sent to the machine and the printing is
started.
Configuring Server to Print Files
Attached to E-mails
You can print a file that the machine receives as
an attachment to an e-mail.
Changing Settings on EtherTalk
(for Mac OS only)
Memo
 Up to 10 files can be printed. The maximum size for each
file is 8 MB.
 PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files can be printed.
 Additional RAM memory may be necessary depending on
the PDF file.
 Printing may not be correct depending on the PDF file.
When printing is not correct, open the file with Adobe
Reader and then print.
 Configuration for POP
Note
 EtherTalk cannot be used with Mac OS X 10.6.
Changing EtherTalk Machine Name
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
3
Select [Network Manager]>
[EtherTalk].
2
Select [Admin Setup].
4
Enter a new name in [Printer Name].
3
Select [Network Manager]>[E-mail]>
[Receive Settings].
5
Click [Send].
4
Select [POP3] and then click [To
STEP2].
- 171 -
Changing Network Settings From the Web Page
Changing EtherTalk Zone
1
Access the machine's web page and log
in as the administrator.
2
Select [Admin Setup].
3
Select [Network Manager]>
[EtherTalk].
4
Enter a new zone name in [Zone
Name].
5
Click [Send].
Note
 Be sure to specify a zone within the same segment.
9
Network Settings
- 172 -
Other Operations
 Other Operations
This section explains how to initialize the network settings and how to setup your machine and computer
to use DHCP.
Configuring DHCP Server
Initializing Network Settings
DHCP assigns an IP address to each host on the
TCP/IP network.
Note
 This procedure initializes all the network settings.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
Note
to select [Admin Setup] and
then press
OK
.
Memo
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter] and then press
5
Press
OK
Make sure that [Network Setup] is
Press
1
Click [Start] and select
[Administrative Tools]>[Server
Manager].
If [DHCP] is already shown in
[Administrative Tools] continue to step 8.
2
Select [Add Roles] on the [Roles
Summary] area.
3
On the [Add Roles Wizard], click
[Next].
4
Select [DHCP Server] and then click
[Next].
5
Follow the on-screen instructions and
configure the settings as necessary.
6
On the [Confirm Installation
Selection] screen, check the settings
and click [Install].
7
When the installation finishes, click
[Close].
8
Click [Start] and select
[Administrative Tools]>[DHCP] to
launch the [DHCP] wizard.
9
On the DHCP list, select a server to use.
.
OK
.
Make sure that [Execute] is selected
and then press
9
OK
 The following steps are explained using Windows Server
2008 as an example. The steps and menus may differ
depending on the OS you use.
to select [Factory Defaults]
and then press
8
- Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and
Windows Server 2003
.
.
selected and then press
7
OK
 The following OSes are supported:
to select [Network Menu] and
then press
6
 The machine must have a static IP address if you want to
print via a network. For details on how to assign a static IP
address, refer to the manual of your DHCP server.
OK
.
On the confirmation screen, press
to select [Yes] and then press
OK
or
.
The network card reboots to initialize the settings.
Using DHCP
You can obtain an IP address from the DHCP
server.
Note
 You must be authorized as the administrator.
 The network system may go down if you enter an incorrect
IP address.
Memo
 You can obtain an IP address from the BOOTP server.
10 From the [Action] menu, select [New
Scope].
- 173 -
Other Operations
11 On the [New Scope Wizard], follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
settings as necessary.
10 Enter the password at [Enter
Password] and then click [OK].
- The factory default password is the last six digits
of the MAC address.
Memo
- The password is case-sensitive.
 Be sure to configure the default gateway settings.
 On the [Activate
Scope] screen, select [Yes,
I want to activate the scope now].
11 Click [OK] on the confirmation window.
The machine restarts to enable the new settings.
The machine status icon changes to red during the
restart. The status icon changes to green when
the machine has restarted and the new settings
have been enabled.
12 Click [Finish].
13 Select the new scope from the DHCP list
and then select [Reservations].
12 From the [File] menu, select [Exit] to
14 From the [Action] menu, select [New
close the Network Card Setup.
Reservation].
15 Configure the settings.
16 Click [Add].
17 Click [Close].
18 From the [File] menu, select [Exit].
Configuring Your Machine
The following explains how to configure your
machine to use DHCP/BOOTP.
Note that since the DHCP/BOOTP protocol is
enabled by factory default, you do not have to
perform this procedure.
Memo
 The following steps are explained using Network Card
Setup as an example. The steps and menus may differ
depending on the software you use.
Turn on the machine.
2
Turn on your computer and insert the
software CD-ROM.
3
Click [Run setup.exe].
9
Network Settings
1
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
4
Select a model and then click [Next].
5
Read the license agreement and click 
[I Agree].
6
Select [Device Configuration]>
[Network Card Setup].
7
Select your machine from the list.
8
From the [Setting] menu, select
[Printer Setting].
9
Enter the IP address and then click [OK].
- 174 -
10.Settings for Auto Delivery and
Transmission Data Save Functions
(for MC561dn Only)
This chapter explains how to configure settings for auto delivery and transmission data save functions.
This machine has the auto delivery and transmission data save functions. These functions can be used
for faxes, internet faxes, and e-mails. You can configure the settings for these functions using the web
browser utility for the machine.
Memo
 The default administrator password of the machine is "aaaaaa".
 Internet Explorer 8 is used here as an example. The details may differ depending on the browser you are using.
Reference
 For details on the web browser utility, refer to "Webpage" P. 103.
 Forwarding Received Faxes As Digital Data (Auto
Delivery)
This chapter explains the auto delivery function and how to configure settings for it.
The auto delivery function forwards received data automatically to specified destinations. You can
specify up to five e-mail addresses and one network folder as destinations.
You can use this function for received faxes, internet faxes, and files attached to e-mails. The data is
forwarded as a PDF or TIFF file depending on the file format of the received data.
You can register up to 100 sets of forwarding destinations for the auto delivery function.
Memo
 When the fax reception mode is set to [Forward Mode], the data is not automatically delivered by this function.
 The received fax is delivered as a PDF file.
 If the received file attached to an e-mail is other than a PDF, JPEG, or TIFF file, it is not forwarded.
 The body text of received e-mails cannot be forwarded.
 The size of data that this function can handle is limited.
 If an SD memory card's capacity is insufficient to store a received internet fax or file attached to an e-mail, auto delivery is not
carried out.
2
Configuration for the Auto
Delivery Function
Reference
Reference
 You need to configure the server settings in advance. For
details on how to configure the server settings, refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
 If specifying a network folder, register a profile beforehand.
For details on how to register a profile, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
1
Enter "http://machine's IP address" in
the address bar and press the <Enter>
key.
Launch your web browser.
- 175 -
 For the machine's IP address, please refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
Forwarding Received Faxes As Digital Data (Auto Delivery)
3
Click [Administrator Login].
4
Enter "admin" in [User Name] and enter
the administrator password in of the
machine in [Password], and then click
[OK].
5
Click [SKIP].
6
7
Click [New] on the [Automated
Delivery Setup] page.
8
Enter a name of your choice in
[Automated Delivery].
9
Select [ON] for [Automated Delivery].
Select [Transmission Settings].
10 Select the check box you require in
10
[Search field].
Settings for Auto Delivery and Transmission
Data Save Functions (for MC561dn Only)
- 176 -
Forwarding Received Faxes As Digital Data (Auto Delivery)
11 Select [OFF] for [Print].
13 Configure a network folder destination.
If you select [ON], the received data is printed
out.
a) Click [Edit] in the [Folder].
b) Select a destination from the [Profile
List] and then click [OK].
12 Configure an e-mail destination.
a) [Click [Edit] in the [E-mail address]
field.
14 Click on [Submit].
b) Enter a recipient email address and click
[Add].
c) Check that the entered address is listed in
the [Address List] field and then click
[OK].
- 177 -
Saving Transmission and Reception Data (Transmission Data Save)
 Saving Transmission and Reception Data
(Transmission Data Save)
This chapter explains the transmission data saving function and how to configure settings for it.
The transmission data save function saves transmitted and received data automatically in a specified
network folder. You can only specify one network folder.
You can use this function for transmitted and received faxes, internet faxes, and files attached to emails. The data is saved as a PDF or TIFF file depending on the file format of the original data.
Note
 When the transmission data save function is enabled, you cannot perform the following operations:
- Real time transmission
- Polling transmission using Fcode bulletin board communication
- Reception using Fcode confidential communication
Memo
 The sent or received fax is saved as a PDF file.
 If the sent or received file attached to an e-mail is other than a PDF, JPEG, or TIFF file, it is not saved.
 The body text of e-mails cannot be saved.
 The size of data that this function can handle is limited.
 If an SD memory card's capacity is insufficient to store a sent or received internet fax or file attached to an e-mail, transmission
data is not saved.
Configuration for the
Transmission Data Save
Function
3
Click [Administrator Login].
4
Enter "root" in [User Name] and enter
the administrator password in of the
machine in [Password], and then click
[OK].
Reference
 You need to configure the server settings in advance. For
details on how to configure the server settings, refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
 Register a profile in advance. For details on how to register
a profile, refer to the User’s Manual Basic.
1
Launch your web browser.
2
Enter "http://machine's IP address" in
the address bar and press the <Enter>
key.
Reference
10
 For the machine's IP address, please refer to the
User’s Manual Basic.
Settings for Auto Delivery and Transmission
Data Save Functions (for MC561dn Only)
- 178 -
Saving Transmission and Reception Data (Transmission Data Save)
5
Click [SKIP].
10 Click on [Select Profile List].
11 Select a destination from the [Profile
List] and then click [OK].
6
Select [Transmission Settings].
12 Click on [Submit].
7
Select [Transmission Settings].
8
Click [Edit] for the desired item.
9
Select [ON]
- 179 -
11.Troubleshooting
This chapter explains items on the limits of initializing, deleting and updating drivers, and when in sleep
mode.
This section explains how to initialize an SD memory card and flash memory, and how to reset the
equipment settings to their defaults.
You can delete data or settings stored on the machine to restore the settings at the time of purchase.
Note
 In the default settings, [Initialize] cannot be selected because [Initial Lock] is set to [Enable]. [Set [Initial Lock] to
[Disable] in [Storage Maintenance Setup]. For details on the initial lock, refer to "Management" P. 97.
Memo
 [In order to access the [Admin Setup] menu, an administrator password is required. The default password is "aaaaaa".
Initializing an SD memory card
(for MC561dn Only)
5
to select [Management] and
then press
6
Carry out initialization of an SD card when
inserting a card that has either been used in
other equipment or when it has not been
properly recognized.
Press
Press
OK
.
to select [SD Memory Card
Setup] and then press
7
8
Formatting the Entire Area
You can format the entire area of the SD memory
card installed in the machine.
OK
.
Make sure that [Execute] is selected
and then press
An SD memory card has three partitions. They
are PS, Common, and PCL. When initialized, it is
divided into partitions again. You can also format
particular partitions individually.
.
Make sure that [Initialize] is selected
and then press
An SD memory card is used as a storage for
spooling when copying sectors, saving secure
print/ encrypted print data, form data and
macros. Initialization deletes stored data.
OK
OK
.
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes] to continue.
Formatting a particular partition
You can initialize a particular partition within the
SD memory card's 3 partitions (PS, Common,
and PCL).
Note
Note
 When you initialize a partition, the following data is
deleted:
 When you initialize all areas of an SD memory card, the
following data is deleted:
- PS: Font data in PS area
- [Stored job data subject to [Secure Print], [Encrypted
Secure Print] or [Store to SD Card].
- Common: Job data and demo data stored with [Secure
Print], [Encrypted Secure Print] or [Store to SD
Card].
- Custom demo data
- Font data
- PCL: Font data in the PCL area
1
Press the <SETTING> key
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
2
Press
to select [Admin Setup] and
then press
OK
.
to select [Admin Setup] and
then press
OK
.
3
Enter the administrator password.
3
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter], and then press
4
Select [Enter], and then press
OK
.
- 180 -
OK
.
Troubleshooting
 Initializing
11
Initializing
5
Press
to select [Management] and
then press
6
Press
OK
to select [SD Memory Card
Setup] and then press
7
Press
Press
OK
You can return the configured settings to their
default.
.
to select [Format Partition]
and then press
8
Resetting the Machine
Settings
.
OK
Note
 When you initialize the equipment settings, the following
data is deleted:
.
to select the partition you want
to initialize and then press
OK
- Stored documents on the Fcode bulletin board
- Fax jobs that have not been sent
.
- Fax jobs received in the Fcode parent box.
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes] to continue.
- Registered job macros
- Dialing logs
- E-mail logs
Initializing Flash Memory
Flash memory has saved mail templates, etc.,
stored on it.
1
Press the <SETTING> key.
2
Press
then press
Use the following steps to initialize.
Note
 When you initialize flash memory, the following data is
deleted:
- Custom demo data
- Font data
to select [Admin Setup] and
Press the <SETTING> key
2
Press
Enter the administrator password.
4
Select [Enter], and then press
5
Press
6
to select [Admin Setup] and
then press
OK
.
.
3
Press
.
OK
.
to select [Reset Settings] and
then press
7
OK
to select [Management] and
then press
1
OK
OK
.
[Make sure that [Execute] is selected
3
Enter the administrator password.
and then press
4
Select [Enter], and then press
5
Press
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes]to continue.
Press
OK
.
to select [Flash Memory
Setup] and then press
7
OK
.
Make sure that [Initialize] is selected
and then press
8
.
to select [Management] and
then press
6
OK
OK
.
Make sure that [Execute] is selected
and then press
OK
.
A message appears confirming you that
continuing will automatically restart the system.
Select [Yes] to continue.
- 181 -
OK
.
Deleting or Updating the Drivers
 Deleting or Updating the Drivers
This section explains how to delete or update the drivers you are using.
11
Note
10 If the [Remove Driver Package] dialog
Deleting a Printer or Fax
Driver
box appears, click [Delete]>[OK].
Note
You can uninstall print and fax drivers.
 If deletion is rejected, restart the computer, and carry
out procedures 4-10 again.
For Windows
11 Click [Close] in the [Printer Server
Properties] dialog box.
Note
12 Restart the computer.
 You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
 Restart the computer before you start removing a driver.
For Mac OS X
1
Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Remove device].
1
From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
If you have specified multiple printer drivers,
select [Remove device]>[OKI MC561(*)].
*Select the type of driver you want to remove.
2
Select [Print & Fax].
3
Select the device you want to remove
and then click [-].
3
 For Mac OS X 10.5-10.6
If a confirmation message appears, click
[Yes].
Note
 If a message appears the device is in use, restart the
computer and try again from step 1 to 2.
4
Click [Printer server properties] on
the top bar with one of any icons
selected in [Printers and Faxes].
5
Select the [Drivers] tab.
6
If [Change Driver Settings] is
displayed, click on it.
7
Select the driver you want to remove and
click [Remove].
8
If a message appears asking you
whether to remove the driver only or the
driver and driver package from your
system. Select to remove the driver and
the driver package and then click [OK].
9
If a confirmation message appears, click
[Yes].
If a confirmation message appears, click [Delete
Printer] (for Mac OS X 10.5, this will be [OK]).
4
Close the [Print & Fax]dialog box.
5
Insert the software CD-ROM into the
computer.
6
Double-click
[OKI]>[Driver]>[Printer]>[Installer
for Mac OSX].
7
Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
Follow the instructions on the screen until the
[Installer for Mac OSX] screen is displayed.
8
Press the triangle button on the
displayed [Quick Install] and then
select [Uninstall].
9
Click on [Uninstall].
10 Click on [Quit].
11 Remove the software CD-ROM from the
- 182 -
computer.
Troubleshooting
 The procedure and display may differ according to the print driver and version of Windows or Mac OS X you are using.
Deleting or Updating the Drivers
 For Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.4.11
For Mac OS X
1
Select [Utilities] from the [Move]
menu.
2
Click on the [Printer Setup Utility] tab.
3
Select the device you want to remove
and click [Delete].
4
Close the [Printer List] dialog box.
5
Uninstall the driver by using the installer.
1
Delete a driver.
Reference
 "Deleting a Printer or Fax Driver" P. 182
2
Install a new driver.
Reference
 For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
Deleting a Scanner Driver
Reference
 For "For Mac OS X 10.5-10.6" P. 182, follow the
procedure in 5-11.
You can delete scanner drivers.
Note
Updating a Printer or Fax
Driver
 You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
You can update printer and fax drivers.
For Windows
For Windows
1
Click on [Start], and then select
[Control Panel]>[Uninstall a
program].
2
Select [OKI MC351/361/561
Scanner] and click on [Uninstall].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
Note
 You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
 Restart the computer before you start removing a driver.
1
Click on [Start] and then select
[Devices and Printers].
2
Right-click the OKI MC561 icon and
select [Printing preferences].
3
If a confirmation message appears, click
[Yes].
If you have installed multiple printer drivers,
select [Printer Properties]>[OKI MC561(*)].
4
Click [Finish] on the [Uninstallation
Complete] screen.
*Select the type of driver you want to remove.
3
For Mac OS X
Click [About] in the [Setup] tab.
For a PS driver, select the [Print Options] tab,
and click on [About].
4
Check the version information and then
click [OK].
5
Delete the driver you want to update.
1
From the hard disk, select
[Library]>[Image Capture]>[TWAIN
Data Sources].
2
Depending on the method of connection
of the machine, the following files will be
deleted.
Note
- Network connection:
OKI MC351_361_561 Twain Network Driver.ds
 Delete all the drivers of the same type (PCL, PS, PCL
XPS, and FAX drivers) to ensure updating.
- USB connection:
OKI MC351_361_561 Twain Network Driver.ds
Reference
 "Deleting a Printer or Fax Driver" P. 182
6
Install a new driver.
Reference
 For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
3
Close the [TWAIN Data Sources]
dialog box.
4
From the hard disk, select
[Applications]>[Okidata]>[Scanner].
5
Delete network scanner setup tool.
- 183 -
Deleting or Updating the Drivers
6
Restart the computer.
11
Updating a Scanner Driver
Troubleshooting
You can update scanner drivers.
Note
 You must be logged on as an administrator to complete
this procedure.
For Windows
1
Click on [Start], right click [Computer]
Select [Properties].
2
Click [Device Manager].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3
Right click the [MC361/561 MFP] icon
on [Imaging Device] and click on
[Properties].
4
Check the version of the scanner driver
on the [Drivers].
5
Delete the scanner driver.
Reference
 "Deleting a Scanner Driver" P. 183
6
Install a new scanner driver.
Reference
 For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
For Mac OS X
1
Delete the scanner driver.
Reference
 "Deleting a Scanner Driver" P. 183
2
Install a new scanner driver.
Reference
 For details on how to install a driver, refer to the User’s
Manual Basic.
- 184 -
Limit Items on When in Sleep Mode
 Limit Items on When in Sleep Mode
This section explains constraints when in sleep mode.
Printer Driver Utility Constraints
When the machine goes into sleep mode, the following limits apply to the printer driver and utility
functions.
When the machine goes into sleep mode, press the <Energy Saving> button on the control panel and
check that the screen shows the front page displayed in default mode.
If the front page is displayed the following constraints do not apply.
OS
Windows
Mac OS X
Software Name
Restrictions When in Sleep
Mode
Method of resolving
other than to press the
<Energy Saving>
button.
Network Extension
Cannot connect to the machine.
-
Network Card Setup
Cannot search the machine or
adjust settings.
-
Print Super Vision
Cannot monitor consumables or the
number of pages printed, etc.
-
Web Driver Installer
 When installing a driver, you
cannot automatically get machine
option information.
 You cannot manual register the
machine on a WDI server.
-
Driver Installer
If there is a connection with the
network, you cannot get printer
option information automatically
when the driver is being installed.
-
Printer Drivers
If there is a EtherTalk connection,
you cannot print.
Network Card Setup
Cannot search the machine or
adjust settings.
-
goes sleep, if the connection is broken it will go into
sleep mode.
Network Function Constraints
In sleep mode, the following constraints apply to
network functions.
Connect to the machine
through TCP/IP.
 When receiving e-mails is activated.
Memo
 If you want to activate sleep mode, please deactivate
IPSec/NetBEUI/NetWare/EtherTalk/receiving email.
Cannot go into sleep mode.
In the following cases, the machine will not go
into sleep mode.
Cannot Print
 If IPSec is activated.
In sleep mode, you cannot print with the
following protocols.
 If NetBEUI is activated.
 NetBEUI
 If NetWare is activated.
 NBT
 If EtherTalk is activated.
 If a TCP connection is being established.
E.g.: If a connection is being established with Telnet
andFTP.
In Power Save Mode, after some time passes and it
 NetWare
 EtherTalk*
 Bonjour (Rendezvous)*
- 185 -
Limit Items on When in Sleep Mode
* For Mac OS X, you can print while in sleep mode with an IP
Print connection.
Cannot Search/Change Settings
Troubleshooting
In sleep mode, you cannot search or change
settings with the following functions/protocols.
11
 PnP-X
 UPnP
 Bonjour (Rendezvous)
 LLTD
 FLDP
 ODNSP
 JCP
 MIB*
* You can refer through part of MIB supported in sleep mode
(Get command).
Protocols with the client function do
not work.
In sleep mode, the following protocols with client
functions will not work:
 Email alerts*1
 SNMP Trap
 WINS*2
 SNTP*3
*1 This does not include times of regular E notifications,
when some time has passed in sleep mode.
*2 This does not include intervals between WINS update
times, when some time has passed in sleep mode.
In order to carry out regular WINS updates in sleep mode,
the names registered on the WINS server may be deleted.
*3 This does not include intervals between update times for
NTP servers when some time has passed in sleep mode.
Protocols that need to have sleep
mode deactivated to be used.
When using the following protocols, deactivate
sleep mode.
 IPv6
 NetBEUI
 NetWare
 EtherTalk
- 186 -
12.Appendix
This chapter explains print control.
 About Using Print Control
Using print control, you can get the log used for this machine.
12
Memo
Note
 If print control is included in the machine, it will print in the configuration report when "JobAccounting: ON".
Number of Job Account IDs
and logs that can be used.
The number of job account IDs that can be
registered and the number of logs that can be
saved in the default state is as shown in the
following table:
 MC361dn
Job
Account
ID
Log
100
About200
Job
Account
ID
Log
100
About 5000
 MC561dn
Memo
 This value may vary depending on the contents of the logs.
- 187 -
Appendix
 The following explanation is different for different versions of print control.
Index
A
L
Real Time Sending .......... 23
ActKey .......................... 45
Large Received Images ....31
Administrator Password ... 98
LPD ............................. 168
Remote Changeover
Number.................. 85
Automatic Delivery........ 175
Automatically set the
date ..................... 104
M
Machine Settings .............74
Repeat Copying .............. 16
Repeated Printing ........... 65
Report Printing ............... 74
Response Time-Out......... 32
Automatically Setting the
Time ...................... 97
Maintaining Paper Size .....60
Manual Sending ..............24
S
B
Memory .........................23
Secure Protocol Server ....155
Binding Margin ............... 17
Black Finish.................. 129
Blurred Fine Lines ........... 59
Memory Capacity ............80
Mixed Document .............19
Monochrome...................67
Multi Purpose Tray...........49
C
Multiple Addressees .........24
Collating Copies .............. 15
N
Color (User Settings) ..... 129
Color Matching ............. 129
Confidential Documents ... 63
Configuration Tool......... 105
Network
Interface Settings .......93
Network Card Setup ...... 143
Network Configuration .....46
D
Network TWAIN Function ...48
Deleting Frames ............. 17
O
Detailed Mode ................ 43
Office Color .................. 129
Document Type .............. 38
Office Document .............61
E
OKI LPR Utility ................68
Elongated Printing........... 52
P
Enlarged Printing ............ 58
Page Splitting .................31
F
Paper Size ................ 52, 55
Forms ........................... 64
FTP ...................... 157, 168
G
GraphicPro ................... 129
Paper Type .....................75
PaperPort ................. 42, 44
PIN ............................. 108
Postscript ................. 68, 69
Power Save Mode ............97
Prefixes .........................22
Secure Scan Mode .......... 48
Sender / Replier ............. 36
Sender Name ................. 21
Sending Faxes
Addressee Group
Lists............... 24
Computer ................. 33
Sending Memory ............ 23
Server Settings
LDAP .......................170
Secure Profiles..........155
Setting Key.................... 72
Simple Mode .................. 42
Simple Scan Mode .......... 48
Simulations...................131
Sleep Mode ............. 97, 185
Sort Copy ...................... 15
Speed Dial List ............... 73
T
Telephone Priority Mode ... 85
TELNET ................ 143, 168
Toner Saving ................. 61
U
Uninstall
Fax drivers...............182
Printer Drivers ..........182
I
Print Job Accounting ...... 123
ICC Profile ..................... 75
Print Job Accounting
Client ................... 114
Web Driver Installer .......101
Printing with a Password ...62
Web page .....................143
Initial Copy Settings ........ 82
Initial Setting Screen ....... 97
Internet
Fax Reading Settings ... 38
PrintSuperVision
MultiPlatform
Edition .................. 101
J
R
Job Macro Key ................ 70
Real Time.......................23
- 188 -
W
Index
Index
Oki Data Corporation
4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,Tokyo
108-8551, Japan
www.okiprintingsolutions.com
44786901EE Rev2
- 189 -
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement